WO2020187054A1 - 传输数据的方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

传输数据的方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020187054A1
WO2020187054A1 PCT/CN2020/078094 CN2020078094W WO2020187054A1 WO 2020187054 A1 WO2020187054 A1 WO 2020187054A1 CN 2020078094 W CN2020078094 W CN 2020078094W WO 2020187054 A1 WO2020187054 A1 WO 2020187054A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
bit
symbols
modulated
constellation
transmitted
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/078094
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
秦熠
汪凡
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP20774142.2A priority Critical patent/EP3930230A4/en
Publication of WO2020187054A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020187054A1/zh
Priority to US17/448,035 priority patent/US11855765B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/36—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
    • H04L27/361—Modulation using a single or unspecified number of carriers, e.g. with separate stages of phase and amplitude modulation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0002—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0009—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the channel coding
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0061—Error detection codes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/3405—Modifications of the signal space to increase the efficiency of transmission, e.g. reduction of the bit error rate, bandwidth, or average power
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0044—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path allocation of payload
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0041—Arrangements at the transmitter end
    • H04L1/0042—Encoding specially adapted to other signal generation operation, e.g. in order to reduce transmit distortions, jitter, or to improve signal shape
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/36—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
    • H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
    • H04L27/38—Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits
    • H04L27/3845—Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits using non - coherent demodulation, i.e. not using a phase synchronous carrier

Definitions

  • This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and communication device for transmitting data in the communication field.
  • the sending end device sends data in the form of sending reference signals and data, where the reference signals are used to demodulate the data.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding, scrambling, and modulation on the data, and maps the obtained modulation symbols on the first time-frequency resource; for reference signals (for example, demodulation reference signal (DMRS)) ,
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the sending end device may map the reference signal to a resource different from the first time-frequency resource among the time-frequency resources used to transmit the data. Therefore, the sending end device sends the reference signal and data in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the data.
  • the reference signal and data are transmitted on different time-frequency resources, and the generation of the reference signal has nothing to do with the data.
  • the optimization process of data transmission for example, channel coding, modulation, or scrambling
  • only the data is optimized
  • the data transmission process needs to send reference signals and data, and the independent design of parameter signals and data makes the data transmission performance may be poor.
  • This application provides a method for transmitting data, which can effectively improve data transmission performance.
  • a method for transmitting data includes:
  • the first bit to be modulated includes a positive integer number of bits
  • P second symbols are transmitted on N resource units, where the P second symbols are the P first symbols, or the P second symbols are based on the P The first symbol determines the symbol.
  • the first bit to be modulated represents the input bit of the modulation process.
  • the method further includes: not sending demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols.
  • the first bit to be modulated may be a part of the bit in the bit stream to be transmitted, or it may be all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, that is,
  • the bit stream to be transmitted may be a bit stream currently to be transmitted that has not undergone physical layer bit-level processing.
  • the physical layer bit-level processing may include one or more of the following processing: segmentation, concatenation, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, and adding cyclic redundancy check (cyclic redundancy check, CRC, etc.).
  • the first bit to be modulated may be a bit obtained by processing at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted by the transmitting end device, where the at least some of the bits may be some bits of the bit stream to be transmitted, or It can be all the bits of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the sending end device may perform channel coding and/or scrambling on the at least part of the bits.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit is obtained by channel coding and/or scrambling the at least part of the bits. Bits.
  • the number of bits of the first bit to be modulated is the first bit number u
  • the number of antenna ports used to transmit the first bit to be modulated is M
  • the number of resource units that carry the first bit to be modulated is N, in other words, N resource units are resource units occupied by one modulation resource block;
  • the first constellation diagram includes 2 u constellations
  • the bit value (denoted as the first bit value) corresponds to the first constellation point.
  • the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit value from the multiple constellation points in the first constellation diagram according to the first bit value of the first bit to be modulated, so as to achieve the The modulation process of the first bit to be modulated to obtain P first symbols.
  • the sending end may also perform other processing on them before sending them, such as layer mapping, resource mapping, etc., which are not done in this embodiment limit.
  • the transmitting end device maps the P first symbols to N resource units, and transmits them using M antenna ports.
  • the transmitting end device further processes the P first symbols (for example, scrambling the P first symbols) to obtain P second symbols, and maps the P second symbols to N On each resource unit, M antenna ports are used for transmission.
  • the transmitting end device modulates the first bit to be modulated on the first constellation point in the constellation diagram, where the first constellation point corresponds to an M*N matrix X .
  • the space generated by the row vector of the matrix X carries the first bit to be modulated, so that the receiving end device can obtain the row vector of the matrix X without knowing the channel state information (ie, H)
  • the generated space can thus be demodulated according to the matrix X to obtain the first bit to be modulated. Therefore, in this method, there is no need to transmit data (for example, the first bit to be modulated) by transmitting a reference signal.
  • this The method can jointly design the scheduled resource units, and the optimization dimension is higher. For example, during optimization, you can consider improving the throughput performance under fading channels to combat channel fading. On the other hand, since there is no need to transmit reference signals, resource overhead can be saved, and resource utilization can be improved, thus effectively improving the throughput performance of data transmission and improving the data transmission performance.
  • no reference signal for demodulating the P first symbols or the P second symbols is sent.
  • the demodulation reference signal of the first channel is not sent, and the first channel is used to carry the P first symbols or the P second symbols.
  • the resource unit corresponding to a constellation point may be referred to as a modulation resource block, and the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block is the resource unit corresponding to a constellation point.
  • N resource units corresponding to the first constellation point are used to transmit the first bit to be modulated, and the N resource units are one modulation resource block.
  • N is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the first bit to be modulated, or N is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted and the first threshold.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the system or communication protocol may specify or default to use only one modulation resource block to carry the bit stream to be transmitted or the bearer is based on the
  • the bit stream obtained from the bit stream to be transmitted does not need to be grouped on the bit stream to be transmitted or the bit stream obtained based on the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the resource unit included in the time-frequency resource scheduled by the network device can be occupied as a modulation resource block Resource unit.
  • the minimum value of T and the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can be used as a modulation
  • the number of resource units occupied by the resource block When the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource is less than T, the time-frequency resource does not need to be grouped, and the resource unit included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can be occupied as a modulation resource block Resource unit.
  • the time-frequency resource can be grouped to obtain multiple resource unit groups, that is, multiple modulation resource blocks are obtained, each The number of resource units occupied by the modulation resource block is all T.
  • the resource unit (for example, N resource units) occupied by a modulation resource block is determined by the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, or by The time-frequency resource of the bit stream and the first threshold determine the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block, which can make the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block not too many.
  • a modulation resource block The channel changes between occupied resource units will not be too great, which helps to improve the data transmission performance in incoherent transmission.
  • the method further includes:
  • the corresponding first constellation diagram can be determined according to N. If the number of resource units corresponding to the constellation diagram supported by the communication protocol or system is a fixed value, similarly, there is no need to determine N, and the corresponding first constellation diagram can be determined according to M. If the communication protocol or system can support different numbers of antenna ports and resource units, the corresponding first constellation diagram can be determined according to M and N.
  • the first constellation diagram is determined according to at least one of M or N and the first bit number u of the first bit to be modulated.
  • the constellation points in the first constellation diagram are obtained by using the first scrambling sequence to scramble the constellation points in the second constellation diagram, and each constellation in the second constellation diagram The dot corresponds to P symbols.
  • the first scrambling sequence includes P scrambling elements, the P scrambling elements correspond to P symbols of each constellation point in the first constellation diagram, and each scrambling element corresponds to each symbol.
  • the first scrambling sequence may be determined based on the first scrambling parameter.
  • the first scrambling parameter may be determined based on at least one of the following: the ID of the terminal device (for example, the temporary Identification (cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNTI)), the ID of the terminal device configured by the network device, the number of the time unit (for example, time slot, mini-slot, frame or symbol), the number of the RB, the number of the modulation resource block Numbering.
  • the P scrambling elements of the first scrambling sequence are not completely the same.
  • the P scrambling elements may be different or partly the same.
  • the first scrambling sequence may be a function of the first scrambling parameter and the number of the resource unit (for example, the number of the time domain unit and/or the frequency domain unit).
  • the amplitudes of the P scrambling elements in the first scrambling sequence are the same, and/or the phases of the P scrambling elements are determined according to the first scrambling parameter.
  • a new constellation diagram (for example, the first constellation diagram) is obtained by scrambling the basic constellation diagram (for example, the second constellation diagram) to obtain a new constellation diagram (for example, the first constellation diagram).
  • the rotation of the constellation diagram allows different scrambling sequences to obtain different new constellation diagrams, which plays a role of pseudo-random.
  • the transmitting end device can further determine the first constellation through the first scrambling parameter used to determine the first scrambling sequence, which realizes non- Interference between different users in coherent transmission is randomized.
  • the method also includes:
  • the first bit to be modulated is determined, the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the The first bit to be modulated.
  • the network device sends first information to the terminal device, and the first information is used to determine the first constellation diagram.
  • the first information may be first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first constellation diagram.
  • the first information may be second indication information and third indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the number M of antenna ports
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the first constellation corresponding to M.
  • the first information may also be fourth indication information.
  • the fourth indication information indicates the number of antenna ports M and the first constellation diagram corresponding to M.
  • the fourth indication information may be based on combining M and the first constellation diagram.
  • the constellation diagram is generated by joint coding.
  • the first information may also be sixth indication information, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate a second constellation diagram.
  • the terminal device can determine the first bit number u based on the constellation diagram (for example, the first constellation diagram or the second constellation diagram) determined by the first information sent by the network device, and obtain the bit number based on u and the bit stream to be transmitted. Is the first bit to be modulated of u.
  • the terminal device may determine the first constellation diagram according to the sixth indication information and the first scrambling sequence, and use the first constellation diagram to modulate the first constellation diagram. A bit to be modulated.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted when u is the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted, the bit stream to be transmitted is regarded as the first bit to be modulated; when u is less than the number of bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, the bit stream to be transmitted The first bit to be modulated in which the number of bits is u is intercepted.
  • the method for transmitting data can be well adapted to scenarios where complete service data cannot be transmitted at one time. Since the complete service data cannot be transmitted at one time, for the case where the sending end device is a terminal device, the terminal device may not know how many bits of service data can be transmitted currently. Therefore, in this scenario, the network device can be used
  • the transmitted constellation diagram (for example, the first constellation diagram or the second constellation diagram) determines the number of bits to be modulated (eg, the first bit to be modulated), and then determines the bits to be modulated, thereby completing the transmission of the bits to be modulated.
  • the first constellation points of the constellation belonging to the third constellation includes a first constellation point L1, the third constellation comprising constellation points L 2, L 2 ⁇ L 1 .
  • the third constellation diagram can be understood as a total constellation diagram, including multiple sub-constellation diagrams, each sub-constellation diagram corresponds to each kind of bit number, or in other words, the third constellation diagram
  • the diagram can be used to determine the sub-constellation diagram corresponding to various bit numbers, and the sub-constellation diagram corresponding to each bit number includes part or all of the constellation points in the third constellation diagram, and the part or all of the constellation points form the third constellation.
  • a sub-constellation diagram in the figure, and the first constellation diagram is a sub-constellation diagram in the third constellation diagram.
  • the transmitting end device can obtain different sizes by saving the total constellation diagram.
  • the multiple sub-constellation diagrams effectively reduce storage space.
  • the k candidate symbols may be QPSK symbols.
  • the method for transmitting data in the embodiment of the present application further designs the first constellation diagram so that the amplitude of each first symbol in the P first symbols in the first constellation point is the same, and/or, The phase difference between any two first symbols in the P first symbols is an integer multiple of S, which can effectively reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR) of the data transmission process and improve the uplink coverage.
  • PAPR peak to average power ratio
  • the P second symbols are symbols determined based on the P first symbols, and include:
  • the P second symbols are determined based on the P first symbols and the second scrambling sequence.
  • the rotation of the P first symbols can be achieved, which is pseudo-random Therefore, the randomization of interference between different users in non-coherent transmission is realized.
  • the method further includes:
  • channel coding is performed on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to obtain the first bit to be modulated, and each of the t resource unit groups is A resource unit group includes a plurality of resource units, the N resource units are resource units in any resource unit group in the t resource unit groups, t is greater than a preset value, and t is an integer.
  • the preset value is an integer value of 1, 2, 3, 4 or greater, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. .
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated, where:
  • the network device is configured with information for indicating a constellation diagram used for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted, wherein each constellation point in the constellation diagram corresponds to multiple resource units; or,
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is control information; or,
  • the channel carrying the bit stream to be transmitted is a physical layer control channel; or,
  • the transmission direction for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted is uplink transmission; or,
  • the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted belongs to the first numerical range; or,
  • the number of antenna ports used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is less than the second threshold; or,
  • the number of resource units occupied by the bit stream to be transmitted is less than the third threshold.
  • a method for transmitting data includes:
  • the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point is determined from the first constellation diagram.
  • the method further includes: not receiving demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols.
  • N is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the first bit to be modulated, or N is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted and the first threshold.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the method further includes:
  • the constellation points in the first constellation diagram are obtained by using the first scrambling sequence to scramble the constellation points in the second constellation diagram, and each constellation point in the second constellation diagram Corresponding to P symbols;
  • the P first symbols correspond to a second constellation point, and the second constellation point is obtained by using a first scrambling sequence to scramble the first constellation point;
  • Determining the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram includes: determining the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the second constellation point from the second constellation diagram.
  • the constellation points in the first constellation diagram belong to a third constellation diagram
  • the first constellation diagram includes L 1 constellation points
  • the third constellation diagram includes L 2 constellation points, L 2 ⁇ L 1 .
  • the P second symbols are symbols obtained by scrambling the P first symbols using a second scrambling sequence
  • the method also includes:
  • the P second symbols are descrambled by using the second scrambling sequence to obtain the P first symbols.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated, where:
  • the network device is configured with information for indicating a constellation diagram used for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted, wherein each constellation point in the constellation diagram corresponds to multiple resource units; or,
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is control information; or,
  • the channel carrying the bit stream to be transmitted is a physical layer control channel; or,
  • the transmission direction for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted is uplink transmission; or,
  • the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted belongs to the first numerical range; or,
  • the number of antenna ports used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is less than the second threshold; or,
  • the number of resource units occupied by the bit stream to be transmitted is less than the third threshold.
  • a communication device may be a sending-end device, a device in a sending-end device, or other devices that can be matched with the sending-end device.
  • the sending-end device may It may be a terminal device or a network device.
  • the device may include a processing unit and a transceiving unit, and the processing unit and the transceiving unit can perform the corresponding functions performed by the transmitter device in any of the design examples of the first aspect, Below, the function of each unit is described in detail.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to use M antenna ports to send P second symbols on N resource units, where the P second symbols are the P first symbols, or the P second symbols The symbol is a symbol determined based on the P first symbols.
  • the transceiver unit is not used to send demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols.
  • a communication device may be a receiving device, a device in a receiving device, or other devices that can be matched with the receiving device, and the receiving device may It may be a terminal device or a network device.
  • the device may include a processing unit and a transceiving unit, and the processing unit and transceiving unit can perform corresponding functions performed by the receiving end device in any of the design examples of the second aspect. Below, the function of each unit is described in detail.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram.
  • the transceiving unit is not used to receive demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, the communication device including a processor, configured to implement the function of the sending end device in the method described in the first aspect.
  • the communication device may further include a memory, the memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor is configured to implement the function of the sending end device in the method described in the first aspect.
  • the memory is used to store program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor can call and execute the program instructions stored in the memory to implement the function of the sending end device in the method described in the first aspect.
  • the communication device may further include a communication interface, and the communication interface is used for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface is a transceiver, an interface, or a circuit, etc.
  • the other device is a receiving end device.
  • the communication device includes:
  • a processor and a communication interface where the processor is used to determine the first bit to be modulated
  • the processor uses the communication interface and uses M antenna ports to transmit P second symbols on N resource units, where the P second symbols are the P first symbols, or the P The second symbol is a symbol determined based on the P first symbols.
  • the communication interface is not used to send demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, the communication device including a processor, configured to implement the function of the receiving end device in the method described in the second aspect.
  • the communication device may further include a memory coupled with the processor, and the processor is configured to implement the function of the receiving end device in the method described in the second aspect.
  • the memory is used to store program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor can call and execute the program instructions stored in the memory to implement the function of the receiving end device in the method described in the second aspect.
  • the communication device may further include a communication interface, and the communication interface is used for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface is a transceiver, an interface, or a circuit, etc.
  • the other device is a transmitter device.
  • the communication device includes:
  • the processor is configured to determine the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram.
  • the communication interface is not used to receive demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the possible designs in the first aspect or the second aspect The method described.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the possible designs of the first to second aspects above The method described in.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes a processor and may also include a memory for implementing the method described in any one of the possible designs of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a system that includes the device described in the fifth aspect and the device described in the sixth aspect, or includes the device described in the third aspect and the device described in the fourth aspect Device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a mobile communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of constellation points in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic interaction diagram of a data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is another schematic diagram of a constellation diagram of an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a modulation resource block according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is another schematic diagram of a modulation resource block according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is another schematic diagram of a modulation resource block according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 is another schematic diagram of a modulation resource block according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10 to 15 are another schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting data according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • At least part can be all or part, for example, “at least part B in A” can mean all B in A, or part B in A.
  • At least one item (a) refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a).
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c It can be single or multiple.
  • a belongs to B can mean that A is a subset of B, or that the content of A is the same as the content of B.
  • a includes B can mean that B is a subset of A, or that the content of A is the same as that of B, or "A includes B” can mean that A includes B and other content, or that A includes only B.
  • the technical feature is distinguished by “first”, “second”, “third”, “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D”.
  • the technical features in the “first”, “second”, “third”, “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” describe the technical features in no order or size order.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency division duplex FDD
  • LTE time division Duplex time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G 5th generation
  • 5G can also be called new radio (NR).
  • the communication equipment may include network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the wireless communication between communication devices may include, but is not limited to: wireless communication between a network device and a terminal device, wireless communication between a network device and a network device, and wireless communication between a terminal device and a terminal device.
  • wireless communication can also be simply referred to as "communication”
  • communication can also be described as "data transmission”, “signal transmission”, “information transmission” or “transmission”.
  • transmission may include sending or receiving.
  • the transmission may be uplink transmission, for example, the terminal device may send a signal to the network device; the transmission may also be downlink transmission, for example, the network device may send a signal to the terminal device.
  • wireless communication between communication devices can be described as: the sending end sends a signal to the receiving end, and the receiving end receives the signal from the sending end.
  • the terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as a terminal, which may be a device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the terminal can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water (such as a ship, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aeroplane, balloon, satellite, etc.).
  • the terminal equipment may be user equipment (UE).
  • UEs include handheld devices, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, or computing devices with wireless communication functions.
  • the UE may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a computer with wireless transceiver function.
  • Terminal devices can also be virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in unmanned driving, wireless terminals in telemedicine, and smart grids.
  • the device used to implement the function of the terminal may be a terminal; it may also be a device capable of supporting the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the terminal is an example to describe the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network equipment involved in the embodiment of the present application includes a base station (BS) or an access network equipment.
  • a base station may be a device that is deployed in a wireless access network and can communicate with a terminal wirelessly.
  • Base stations may come in many forms, such as macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, and access points.
  • the base station involved in the embodiments of the present application may be a base station in 5G or a base station in LTE, where the base station in 5G may also be called a transmission reception point (TRP) or gNB (gNodeB).
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • gNodeB gNodeB
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device; it may also be a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the device for implementing the functions of the network equipment may be taken as an example to describe the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the device for implementing the function of the terminal device or the device for implementing the function of the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and The application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system, or windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as they can communicate according to the methods provided in the embodiments of the application, for example, the execution of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application
  • the main body can be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the network device that can call and execute the program.
  • various aspects or features of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article used in the embodiments of this application covers a computer program that can be accessed from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • magnetic storage devices for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.
  • optical disks for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.
  • smart cards and flash memory devices for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards,
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a mobile communication system applicable to embodiments of the present application.
  • the mobile communication system includes a core network device 110, a wireless access network device 120, and at least one terminal device (the terminal device 130 and the terminal device 140 in FIG. 1).
  • the terminal device is connected to the wireless access network device in a wireless manner
  • the wireless access network device is connected to the core network device in a wireless or wired manner.
  • the core network equipment and the wireless access network equipment can be separate and different physical equipment, or the functions of the core network equipment and the wireless access network equipment can be integrated on the same physical device, or they can be integrated on one physical device. Some core network equipment functions and some wireless access network equipment functions.
  • the terminal device can be a fixed location or movable.
  • Fig. 1 is only a schematic diagram.
  • the communication system may also include other network equipment, such as wireless relay equipment and wireless backhaul equipment, which are not shown in Fig. 1.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of core network equipment, radio access network equipment, and terminal equipment included in the mobile communication system.
  • current wireless communication transmits data based on coherent transmission, that is, transmits data based on reference signals, where the data can be business data or various information used for wireless communication, such as , The control information carried on the physical layer data channel.
  • the transmitted data may also be referred to as data to be transmitted.
  • the generation of the reference signal has nothing to do with the data to be transmitted. Therefore, in the optimization process of the data transmission, the data is only optimized in the process of channel coding, scrambling, or modulation.
  • the data transmission needs to send reference signals and data, and the independent design of reference signals and data makes the data transmission performance poor. For example, the transmission conditions of the reference signal and the data may not match, resulting in a high error rate of the demodulation result obtained when the data is demodulated based on the reference signal, and therefore a low data transmission rate.
  • an embodiment of the present application proposes a method for transmitting data.
  • the sending end device may not need to transmit data based on a reference signal, that is, there is no need to send a reference signal during data transmission.
  • the receiving end device also does not need to estimate the channel state through the reference signal to demodulate the data.
  • the data can be uniformly designed and optimized.
  • the data transmission method provided in the embodiments of the present application can have better throughput performance, thereby improving Data transmission performance.
  • the transmitting end device may be referred to as the transmitting end for short, and the transmitting end device may be a terminal device or a network device;
  • the receiving end device may be referred to as a receiving end for short, and the receiving end device may be a network device or a terminal device.
  • the transmission mode provided in the embodiment of the present application may be referred to as non-coherent transmission.
  • the resource unit can be used as the measurement unit of the resource in the time domain, the frequency domain, or the time-frequency domain.
  • the measurement unit of the resource in the time-frequency domain can be expressed as a resource unit, and the resource unit can be, for example, a resource particle (resource element, RE) or resource block (resource block, RB), etc.
  • the RE can also be called a resource element.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • one RE can correspond to one time domain symbol in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource of the RE may be an example of a resource unit.
  • the time domain symbol may be an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) symbol or a single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) symbol.
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • An RB includes in the frequency domain Consecutive subcarriers. among them, Is a positive integer. For example, in LTE or 5G, Can be equal to 12.
  • the RB may be defined only in the frequency domain, that is, the number of time domain resources occupied by the RB in the time domain is not limited; the RB may also be defined in the time domain and the frequency domain, for example, one RB In the frequency domain including Consecutive subcarriers and the time domain includes a positive integer number of time domain symbols, for example, the time domain includes 7, 14, 6, or 12 time domain symbols.
  • the time-frequency resource of the RB may be another example of the resource unit.
  • the resource unit group can also be used as another measurement unit of resources in the time domain, frequency domain, or time-frequency domain.
  • a resource unit group includes a positive integer number of resource units.
  • a resource unit group may include a positive integer number of subcarriers in the frequency domain, and the time domain includes a positive integer number of time domain symbols, time slots or subframes, etc., that is, a resource unit group includes a positive integer number of REs.
  • a resource unit group may include a positive integer number of RBs in the frequency domain, and the time domain includes a positive integer number of time domain symbols, time slots or subframes, etc., that is, a resource unit group includes a positive integer number of REs.
  • a time slot may include a positive integer number of time domain symbols, for example, 7 or 14 time domain symbols.
  • One subframe may include a positive integer number of time slots or a positive integer number of time domain symbols.
  • one time slot can be configured to include 14 time-domain symbols, and one The length of the subframe is 1 millisecond. Since the symbol lengths of different subcarrier intervals may be different, the number of time slots included in subframes corresponding to different subcarrier intervals may be different.
  • the resource unit in the resource unit group may be a resource unit corresponding to a constellation point in the modulation process. Therefore, the resource unit group may also be called a modulation resource block. In the following, the resource unit group and the modulation resource block You can replace the description.
  • the constellation diagram is used to modulate the bits to be modulated.
  • the bits to be modulated (or called data to be modulated) include u bits. Since the value of each bit can be 0 or 1, there are 2 possible values. Then, the value of the u bits has 2 There are u possibilities. Therefore, the constellation diagram corresponding to the u bits includes 2 u constellation points, and each constellation point corresponds to multiple complex-valued modulation symbols, and the 2 u constellation points correspond to the 2 u possible bits one by one. Value, each bit value represents a possible value of the u bits.
  • u is a positive integer. In the embodiment of the present application, the positive integer can be an integer of 1, 2, 3 or greater.
  • the transmitting end device may determine the corresponding constellation diagram based on u, and determine the constellation point corresponding to the value of the u bits from the multiple constellation points in the constellation diagram, thereby obtaining the constellation point corresponding to the determined constellation point
  • the complex-valued modulation symbol may map the obtained complex-valued modulation symbols or the complex-valued symbols obtained based on the obtained complex-valued modulation symbols to time-frequency resources for transmission.
  • the real part and imaginary part of the complex value here may not be zero, one of them may be zero, or both may be zero.
  • the constellation diagram here can also be considered as a modulation mapping from bit values to complex-valued modulation symbols, that is, for a given constellation diagram, it can be considered that the constellation diagram is between the input bit value and the output complex-valued modulation symbol
  • the mapping relationship can be described in the form of tables and/or formulas, and the specific form is not limited here.
  • the complex-valued modulation symbol may also be called a complex-valued modulation symbol, a complex-valued modulation symbol, a complex symbol, or a symbol.
  • the constellation diagram is not only related to the number of bits to be modulated, and the constellation points in the constellation diagram are constellation points corresponding to at least one antenna port and multiple resource units.
  • An element can be understood as a complex-valued modulation symbol (symbol for short), and P elements are P symbols.
  • the elements may be collectively referred to as symbols, and the two descriptions may be replaced with each other.
  • the P elements can be recorded as a matrix of M rows and N columns (M*N) or N rows and M columns (N*M), or the P elements can be recorded as one element
  • M*N M rows and N columns
  • N*M N rows and M columns
  • the P elements can be recorded as one element
  • this article does not exclude other description methods.
  • the P elements may be a sequence of length P. In this way, the transmitting end device can determine the constellation point corresponding to the bit to be modulated from the multiple constellation points in the constellation diagram according to the bit value of the bit to be modulated, so as to realize the modulation process for the bit to be modulated and obtain P symbols .
  • a constellation point in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to a modulation symbol group, and a modulation symbol group includes P complex modulation symbols, and any one of the P complex modulation symbols may have a real part of 0 and / Or a complex number whose imaginary part is 0.
  • the constellation diagram in the embodiment of the present application can also be considered as a modulation mapping from bit values to modulation symbol groups. That is, for a given constellation diagram, it can be considered that the constellation diagram is the mapping relationship between the input bit value and the output modulation symbol group.
  • the mapping relationship can be described in the form of tables and/or formulas, and the specific form is not limited here.
  • modulation symbol group in the embodiment of the present application may also have other names, such as a modulation symbol sequence or a modulation symbol matrix or a modulation symbol.
  • the embodiments of the present application take one constellation point corresponding to one modulation symbol group as an example, or take one constellation point corresponding to one modulation symbol sequence as an example, or take one constellation point corresponding to one modulation symbol matrix as an example. Description.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of a constellation point according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the matrix corresponding to the constellation point is denoted as X
  • the matrix X can be an M*N matrix (of course, the matrix X can also be an N*M matrix, where Taking the M*N matrix as an example), the matrix includes 8 symbols.
  • M*N matrix it can be understood that the symbols in the mth row and nth column of the matrix X are mapped to the nth resource unit, and pass m antenna ports are transmitted.
  • m is taken from 0 to 1 (that is, m is an integer ranging from 0 to 1)
  • n is from 0 to 3 (that is, n is an integer ranging from 0 to 3).
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes one or more bits.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted may be a bit stream currently to be transmitted that has not undergone physical layer bit-level processing.
  • the physical layer bit-level processing may include one or more of the following processing: segmentation, concatenation, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, and adding cyclic redundancy check (cyclic redundancy check, CRC, etc.).
  • the bit stream to be transmitted can be delivered by the media access control (MAC) layer of the sender to the physical layer of the sender, or the information bits of the physical layer control channel.
  • the sender can channel-encode and add the bit stream to be transmitted. Processing such as scrambling or modulation.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted can be understood as the current data to be transmitted, which can be service data or control information carried on the physical layer data channel, or various other control information used for wireless communication
  • the service data can be data carried on the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or data carried on the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) Etc.
  • the other control information may be information carried on a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) (for example, downlink control information (DCI)), or may be carried on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • DCI downlink control information
  • PUCCH physical downlink control channel
  • Information on the uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH) for example, uplink control information (UCI)), etc.
  • the uplink control information may include, but is not limited to, acknowledgement (ACK), negative acknowledgement (negative acknowledgment, NACK), channel state information (channel state information, CSI), scheduling request information, beam interruption recovery request information, etc.
  • ACK/NACK is used to feed back whether the information is correctly received
  • CSI is used to feed back the status of the channel.
  • Information for example, channel state information, precoding matrix indication or rank indication, etc.
  • scheduling request information is used by the terminal device to request scheduling resources from the network device
  • beam interruption recovery request information is used by the terminal device to report beam interruption to the network device and request to proceed Beam interruption recovery.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted and the data to be transmitted can be described alternatively.
  • the embodiment of this application uses the non-coherent transmission method to transmit data, and the transmitting end device or the receiving end device may not need to transmit data based on the reference signal. Based on this, relevant designs are made for the modulation process of non-coherent transmission, and the physical layer is further designed. Other processes in the processing of data, such as channel coding, scrambling and other processes.
  • the reference signal may also be called a pilot, demodulation reference signal, and so on.
  • All the methods in the embodiments of this application can be applied to uplink transmission and downlink transmission, can also be applied to communication between network devices such as macro base stations and micro base stations, and can also be applied to terminal devices and device-to-device communication between terminal devices.
  • Device device to device, D2D
  • the sending end device and the receiving end device are unified as the executive body of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the sending end device generates and sends data
  • the receiving end device receives and demodulates the data.
  • the sending end device may be a network device, or a chip configured in the network device, etc., which can execute the device of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving end device is a terminal device or is configured in a terminal device The chip, etc., can execute the device of the embodiment of this application; or, the sending end device can also be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device, etc., which can execute the device of the embodiment of this application.
  • the receiving device is a network A device or a chip configured in a network device can execute the apparatus of the embodiment of the present application.
  • multiple resource units corresponding to a constellation point may be referred to as a modulation resource block, or in other words, a complex value of a constellation point will be sent
  • the multiple resource units used when modulating symbols are called a modulation resource block.
  • the modulation resource block is used as a unit to modulate the modulated bits.
  • the modulation resource block corresponding to the constellation point shown in FIG. 2 includes 4 resource units.
  • the bit to be modulated (for example, the first bit to be modulated) carried by any modulation resource block may be used as an example to describe the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic interaction diagram of a data transmission method 200 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the transmitting end device determines the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated represents the input bit of the modulation process.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated may be part of the bit in the bit stream to be transmitted, or may be all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the number of resource units corresponding to one constellation point may be limited. However, in actual transmission, the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may be more than one constellation point. In this case, the resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can be divided into multiple groups to obtain multiple modulation resource blocks. Wherein, the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may be pre-configured, or may be scheduled by the network device for the terminal device, for example, sent to the terminal device through DCI, which is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted can be divided into multiple groups, a group of bits includes u bits, and the multiple groups of bits correspond to an equal number of multiple modulation resource blocks, and each modulation resource A block carries its corresponding set of bits.
  • any group of bits can be used as the first bit to be modulated, and the first bit to be modulated is a part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted may be used as the first bit to be modulated, and the first bit to be modulated is all bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the sending end device may send the first to-be-modulated bit through a modulation resource block.
  • the sending end device may repeat the transmission of the bit stream to be transmitted, the number of repeated transmissions is the number of modulation resource blocks, and each transmission uses one modulation resource block, any two times Different modulation resource blocks are used for transmission.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is modulated, and the modulated symbols are mapped to the corresponding modulation resource blocks.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is regarded as one
  • the bits to be modulated carried by the modulation resource block, where the bit stream to be transmitted is the first bit to be modulated, and the first bit to be modulated is all bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the first bit to be modulated may be a bit obtained by processing at least part of the bit in the bit stream to be transmitted by the transmitting end device, where the at least part of the bit may be a part of the bit in the bit stream to be transmitted , Or all the bits of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the sending end device may perform channel coding and/or scrambling on the at least part of the bits.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit is obtained by channel coding and/or scrambling the at least part of the bits. Bits.
  • the sending end device may also perform other processing on the at least part of the bits, such as one or more of the following processing: code block segmentation, adding CRC, rate matching, and code block concatenation, etc.,
  • the embodiments of this application do not make limitations.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding on at least part of the bits
  • the main difference between the two methods is that one way is to perform channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted, The bit stream obtained based on channel coding is grouped or not grouped to determine the first bit to be modulated; another way is to perform channel coding on the grouped or not grouped bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to obtain new bits. Determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the former method, at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted in the design are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; when the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the latter method
  • modulating bits if the bit stream to be transmitted is grouped, then at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted in the design is part of the bit stream to be transmitted. If the bit stream to be transmitted is not grouped, the At least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted in the design are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding and scrambling on at least some of the bits
  • the main difference between the two methods is that one method is to transmit the bit to be transmitted. After the stream is channel coded and scrambled, the obtained new bit stream is grouped or not grouped to determine the first bit to be modulated; another way is to perform channel coding on the grouped or not grouped bits in the bit stream to be transmitted And scrambling to obtain a new bit to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the former method, at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted in the design are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; when the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the latter method
  • modulating bits if the bit stream to be transmitted is grouped, then at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted in the design is part of the bit stream to be transmitted. If the bit stream to be transmitted is not grouped, the At least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted in the design are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the transmitting end device determines the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit to be modulated from the first constellation diagram.
  • the transmitting end device uses M antenna ports to transmit P second symbols on N resource units, where the P second symbols are the P first symbols, or, the P second symbols are based on The symbols determined by the P first symbols.
  • the sending end device does not need to send a reference signal to the receiving end device. That is, there is no need to transmit P second symbols based on the reference signal in this method.
  • the constellation diagram is not only related to the number of bits to be modulated, and the constellation points in the constellation diagram are constellation points for at least one antenna port and multiple resource units.
  • the number of bits of the first bit to be modulated is the first bit number u
  • the number of antenna ports used to transmit the first bit to be modulated is M.
  • each constellation point corresponds to the value of a bit to be modulated (abbreviated as bit value).
  • bit value the bit value of the first bit to be modulated (denoted as the first bit value) from the first constellation
  • the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit value is determined among the multiple constellation points, so that the modulation process for the first bit to be modulated is realized, and P symbols corresponding to the first constellation point are obtained, and the P symbols can be called Are P first symbols.
  • the modulation process can be regarded as a modulation mapping of bit values to modulation symbol groups.
  • the above-mentioned modulation methods can be respectively used for the plurality of first to-be-modulated bits, so as to achieve modulation of the to-be-transmitted bit stream.
  • the transmitting end device can map P first symbols to N resource units of M antenna ports, and use M antenna ports to transmit, where each antenna port is on N resource units Map the N first symbols of the P first symbols; or, in another possible design, the sending end device performs further processing on the P first symbols (for example, performs (Scrambling processing) to obtain P second symbols, map the P second symbols to N resource units of M antenna ports, and use M antenna ports to transmit, where each antenna port is on N resource units Map the N second symbols of the P second symbols.
  • further processing on the P first symbols for example, performs (Scrambling processing) to obtain P second symbols, map the P second symbols to N resource units of M antenna ports, and use M antenna ports to transmit, where each antenna port is on N resource units Map the N second symbols of the P second symbols.
  • the phase difference between the two first symbols is an integer multiple of S, and it can be understood that the phase difference between the two first symbols is 0 times, 1 times, 2 times, ..., or k times of S.
  • the phase difference between the two first symbols is 0 times S can be understood as the phase difference between the two first symbols is 0, the phase difference between the two first symbols is 0 can also be understood as the two first symbols
  • the phase difference between one symbol is k times S.
  • the phase difference between the two first symbols is greater than or equal to 2*pi, or, when the phase difference is less than 0, the phase difference between the two first symbols is the phase difference modulo 2*pi the result of.
  • each of the P first symbols is a quadrature phase shift keying (quadrature phase shift keying, QPSK) symbol or a binary phase shift keying (binary phase shift keying, BPSK) symbol. )symbol.
  • QPSK quadrature phase shift keying
  • BPSK binary phase shift keying
  • each first symbol in the P first symbols is a BPSK symbol
  • the value of any symbol in the P first symbols can be a complex number e j2 ⁇ or e j ⁇
  • the values of different symbols may be the same or different, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • j represents the imaginary unit
  • the square of j is equal to -1.
  • the phase difference between any two first symbols in the P first symbols is an integer multiple of S, and for two different first symbols, the integer multiple may be the same or different values.
  • each of the 8 first symbols can be any one of the 4 candidate symbols, and any two of the 8 first symbols can be the same candidate symbol or Are different candidate symbols.
  • the 4 candidate symbols are [1,-1,j,-j]
  • the 8 first symbols may be [1,1,1,-1,-1,j,j,-j].
  • j represents the imaginary unit, and the square of j is equal to -1.
  • the matrices corresponding to any two constellation points in the multiple constellation points of the first constellation diagram may be different. Specifically, the elements in the matrices corresponding to any two constellation points are not completely different, that is, the matrices in any two matrices The elements of can be completely different or partly the same, but at least one element in any two matrices is different. Optionally, the matrix corresponding to one constellation point in the first constellation diagram and the matrix corresponding to other constellation points in the first constellation diagram are not in a linear relationship.
  • the receiving end device determines the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram.
  • the sending end device When the sending end device sends P first symbols or P second symbols to the receiving end device through the channel, the transmitted symbols may have amplitudes in the channel due to various reasons such as fading, noise, or Doppler shift And/or the deformation in phase, in order to simplify the description, the receiving end device also records the deformed symbol as P first symbols or P second symbols.
  • the sending end device sends P first symbols, that is, the P second symbols sent by the sending end device are P first symbols, and the receiving end device demodulates the P first symbols to obtain the first symbol. Modulation bits; when the transmitting end device further processes the P first symbols and sends the processed P second symbols, the receiving end device can obtain the P first symbols based on the P second symbols, And demodulate the P first symbols to obtain the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit is the bit after channel coding and/or scrambling of the bit in the bit stream to be transmitted by the transmitting end device, the receiving end device may further decode and/or Descramble to obtain bits that have not been channel-coded and/or scrambled.
  • the first bit to be modulated is the demodulation output bit of the receiving end device.
  • the first to be modulated bit on the receiving end device Bits.
  • a generalized likelihood ratio test (GLRT) receiver is taken as an example to briefly describe how the receiving end device demodulates data. It should be understood that the receiving end device may also demodulate data in other ways, which is not limited here.
  • GLRT generalized likelihood ratio test
  • the receiving end device can calculate the distance d between the matrix corresponding to the P first symbol and the matrix corresponding to the i-th constellation point according to the following formula i .
  • the matrix H is an S*M-dimensional matrix, which represents the channel used to transmit the P first symbols.
  • State information channel state information, CSI
  • matrix W is an S*N-dimensional matrix representing the noise in the channel
  • X represents P first symbols
  • X is an M*N matrix
  • M is used to transmit the first modulation
  • N is the number of resource units used to transmit the first bit to be modulated
  • trace represents the matrix
  • Y H represents the conjugate transpose of matrix Y
  • X i represents the conjugate transpose
  • S is a positive integer.
  • X 4 [1,-1,-1,1], corresponding to the bit value 11.
  • the sending end device takes 1 to 4 for i (that is, starts from 1, takes 1 to 4 for i respectively, that is, i is equal to 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively), and pass The above-described 4 matrix are brought into the equation, to give the corresponding 4 X i 4 d i values.
  • d i can represent the difference between the subspaces generated by the row vectors of the two matrices to a certain extent.
  • the sending end device does not need to send a reference signal to the receiving end device, and the receiving end device does not need to receive P second symbols based on the reference signal.
  • the reference signal may be referred to as the reference signal, pilot or demodulation reference signal of the P second symbols.
  • the reference signal may also be referred to as a reference signal, pilot or demodulation reference signal of the physical channel.
  • one constellation point corresponds to one symbol, and one symbol carries the bit to be modulated.
  • the bit to be modulated is carried in the direction of matrix X itself, or when matrix X is expressed as M*
  • the space generated by the row vector of the matrix X carries the bits to be modulated. That is to say, the space generated by the row vectors of the matrix corresponding to different constellation points in a constellation diagram is different, so the spaces corresponding to different bits to be modulated are also different.
  • the constellation point matrix in the constellation diagram is normalized, that is, Wherein, the matrix X i represents the modulation symbol matrix corresponding to the i-th constellation point in the first constellation diagram.
  • multiplying X 2 by the left matrix I can be understood as performing a linear transformation on X 2.
  • X 2 can be transformed into X 1 by linear transformation, then the space generated by the row vectors of X 1 and X 2 Is the same, so in incoherent transmission, there is no such I.
  • the receiving end device does not need to know the channel state information (ie, H) to get the row vector of X
  • the channel state information ie, H
  • the transmitting end device modulates the first bit to be modulated on the first constellation point in the constellation diagram, where the first constellation point corresponds to an M*N matrix X ,
  • H represents the channel state information
  • multiplying H by X is a linear transformation of X, because the linear transformation of the matrix does not change
  • the space generated by the row vector, so the space generated by the row vector of H*X is the same as the space generated by the row vector of X.
  • the first bit to be modulated is carried in the direction of the matrix X itself, or in other words, is the spatial bearing generated by the row vector of the matrix X
  • the first bit to be modulated so that the receiving end device can obtain the space generated by the row vector of matrix X without knowing the channel state information (ie, H), so that the first to be modulated can be demodulated according to the matrix X. Modulation bits. Therefore, in this method, there is no need to transmit data (for example, the first bit to be modulated) by transmitting a reference signal.
  • this The method can jointly design the scheduled resource units, and the optimization dimension is higher. For example, during optimization, you can consider improving the throughput performance under fading channels to combat channel fading. On the other hand, since there is no need to transmit reference signals, resource overhead can be saved, and resource utilization can be improved, thus effectively improving the throughput performance of data transmission and improving the data transmission performance.
  • both the receiving end device and the transmitting end device need to know the first constellation diagram.
  • the following describes the manner in which the transmitting end device and the receiving end device determine the first constellation diagram.
  • Manner 1-1 determines the first constellation diagram according to at least one of M and N.
  • This method can be applied to sender and receiver devices that perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
  • a first constellation diagram is determined according to at least one of M and N, where each constellation point in the first constellation diagram corresponds to P symbols.
  • At least one of M and N may be M, N, or M and N.
  • the corresponding first constellation diagram can be determined according to N. If the number of resource units corresponding to the constellation diagram supported by the communication protocol or system is a fixed value, similarly, there is no need to determine N, and the corresponding first constellation diagram can be determined according to M. If the communication protocol or system can support a variable number of antenna ports and resource units, the corresponding first constellation diagram can be determined according to M and N.
  • M may be configured by a network device.
  • the network device may indicate M to the terminal device through signaling, so that the terminal device determines M.
  • the sending end device or the receiving end device here is from the perspective of the bits to be modulated. From the perspective of M, the network device is the sending end device and the terminal device is the receiving end device.
  • the manner of determining N reference may be made to the related description below regarding the manner of determining the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block.
  • the first constellation diagram when the first constellation diagram is determined according to at least one of M and N, there may be multiple candidate constellation diagrams, and any one of the candidate constellation diagrams has its corresponding M i and N i .
  • M i is a plurality of candidates of the i th constellation constellation corresponding to M
  • N i is a plurality of candidates of the i th constellation constellation corresponding to N
  • i is greater than 1 and less than the candidate constellation The number of integers.
  • the constellation point in the i-th constellation diagram in the multiple candidate constellation diagrams is a M i *N i -dimensional matrix.
  • the selected constellation diagram may be used as the first constellation diagram.
  • the selected constellation diagram when the first constellation diagram is determined according to the selected constellation diagram, the selected constellation diagram includes more than 2 u constellation points, and the selected constellation diagram can be further regarded as the following according to mode 1-2
  • the total constellation diagram in mode 1-2, and the first constellation diagram is determined according to the method described in mode 1-2.
  • the method can be described as determining the first constellation diagram according to at least one of M and N, and according to u.
  • the constellation points in the constellation diagram supported by the system are all M*N-dimensional matrices, it can be considered that there is no need to determine the first constellation diagram according to at least one of M and N, and it can only be determined according to the system The supported constellation diagram determines the first constellation diagram.
  • the constellation diagrams supported in the system are multiple candidate constellation diagrams, where the i-th candidate constellation diagram includes 2 ui constellation points, and i is an integer greater than 1 and less than the number of candidate constellation diagrams.
  • a constellation diagram corresponding to u may be selected from the multiple candidate constellation diagrams, the first constellation diagram is the selected constellation diagram, and the selected constellation diagram includes 2 u constellation points.
  • the multiple candidate constellation diagrams may be multiple independent constellation diagrams, or multiple sub-constellation diagrams described in the following manners 1-2, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the constellation diagram supported in the system is the total constellation diagram in the following manner 1-2, and the first constellation diagram may be determined according to the method described in manner 1-2.
  • Method 1-2 determines the first constellation diagram according to u.
  • the first constellation diagram may be an independent constellation diagram, may also be a sub-constellation diagram of a general constellation diagram, or may be a general constellation diagram including multiple sub-constellation diagrams. If the first constellation diagram is related to the overall constellation diagram, in order to facilitate the description of the process of determining the first constellation diagram, first, describe the overall constellation diagram involved, and then explain the relationship between the first constellation diagram and the overall constellation diagram .
  • a total constellation diagram may be designed, and the total constellation diagram may include sub-constellation diagrams corresponding to multiple numbers of bits.
  • the total constellation diagram includes C 2 constellation points, and the sub-constellation diagram includes C 1 constellation points, and C 2 >C 1 . among them, p 2 >p 1 , where p 1 is an integer and p 2 is a positive integer.
  • the total constellation diagram can be used to determine the sub-constellation diagrams corresponding to various bit numbers
  • p 2 can be understood as the maximum number of bits in the various bit numbers
  • the sub-constellation diagram corresponding to each bit number includes the part of the total constellation diagram Or all constellation points, this part or all of the constellation points form a sub-constellation diagram.
  • the total constellation diagram includes 4 constellation points
  • the constellation points are (1,1), (1,j), (1,-1), (1,-j)
  • the constellation points in the sub-constellation diagram can be any two of the above four constellation points or two predefined ones, for example, the sub-constellation diagram
  • the constellation points are (1,1) and (1,j).
  • j is an imaginary unit
  • the square of j is equal to -1. It can be seen that the total constellation diagram can be used to determine the sub-constellation diagrams corresponding to two bit numbers (1 and 2), and 2 is the maximum number of bits in the two bit numbers.
  • the number of antenna ports and the number of resource units corresponding to multiple constellation points in the overall constellation diagram can be the same, or the number of antenna ports and the number of resource units corresponding to multiple sub-constellation diagrams in the overall constellation diagram can be the same of.
  • the 4 constellation points correspond to M 1 antenna ports and N 1 resource units
  • M 1 is a positive integer
  • N 1 is an integer greater than 1
  • p 1 The sub-constellation formed by 2 constellation points corresponding to 1 also corresponds to M 1 antenna ports and N 1 resource units.
  • the transmitting end device and the receiving end device may only need to save a total constellation diagram to obtain sub-constellation diagrams of different sizes, which can reduce storage space.
  • the embodiment of the present application may determine the first constellation diagram according to u.
  • the constellation points in the first constellation diagram belong to the third constellation diagram
  • the first constellation diagram includes L 1 constellation points
  • the third constellation diagram includes L 2 constellation points
  • L 2 ⁇ L 1 where L 1 and L 2 are integers greater than zero.
  • L 2 2 v
  • v is greater than or equal to u
  • v is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the third constellation diagram may be the above-mentioned total constellation diagram, and the first constellation diagram may be the above-mentioned sub-constellation diagram or the total constellation diagram.
  • L 2 is analogous to C 2
  • p 2 is analogous to v
  • L 1 is analogous to C 1 Or C 2
  • p 1 is analogous to u.
  • the transmitting end device or the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram from the third constellation diagram according to u.
  • u can be obtained in the following manner, and the corresponding first constellation diagram is determined based on the obtained u.
  • the first constellation diagram may be the above-mentioned total constellation diagram, p 2 is analogous to u, and p 1 is analogous to v.
  • the sending end device may use at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted as the first bit to be modulated, or may perform processing (for example, channel coding and/or scrambling) on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted Get the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated here is recorded as the old first bit to be modulated.
  • the transmitting-end device may add u-v bits to the old first to-be-modulated bit to obtain a new first to-be-modulated bit.
  • the number of the old first bit to be modulated is v
  • the bit number of the new first to be modulated bit is u
  • u is greater than or equal to v.
  • the bit value of the u-v bit may be pre-configured.
  • the uv bit 0 bit or 1 bit can be added before the old first bit to be modulated, or the uv bit 0 bit or 1 bit can be added after the old first bit to be modulated, or according to other predefined rules as The old first bit to be modulated supplements the uv bit.
  • the u-v bit 0 bit can be described as: u-v bits with a value of 0
  • the u-v bit 1 bit can be described as: u-v bits with a value of 1.
  • both the old first bit to be modulated and the new first bit to be modulated can be regarded as the first bit to be modulated in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second possible design of Manner 1-2 it modulates the new first bit to be modulated.
  • the determination method of the bit number v of the old first bit to be modulated refer to the description of u in the process of determining the first bit to be modulated in the following embodiments.
  • the receiving end device for the receiving end device, according to the predefined rules, it can be determined that the total constellation is the first constellation, and it is also confirmed that the maximum number of bits corresponding to the total constellation is The number of bits is u. Based on the determined v, the uv bit 0 or 1 bit can be removed from the new first bit to be modulated according to a predefined rule, so as to obtain the old first bit to be modulated.
  • the old first bit to be modulated is 00
  • the transmitting end device adds 2 bits and 1 bit before the old first bit to be modulated to obtain the new first bit to be modulated
  • the bit is 1100.
  • the receiving end device removes the first 2 bits of 1100 and 1 bit according to a predefined rule to obtain the old first bit to be modulated "00".
  • Mode 2 Indicate the first constellation diagram through signaling
  • This method can be applied to terminal equipment performing uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the method for determining the first constellation diagram by the network device can refer to Method 1 or Method 2 or other methods.
  • the terminal device can determine the first constellation diagram in the following manner .
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first constellation diagram.
  • the first indication information may be a matrix value corresponding to the first constellation diagram.
  • the first indication information may be an index corresponding to the first constellation diagram, and both the terminal device and the network device know at least one constellation diagram and an index corresponding to each constellation diagram.
  • the number of antenna ports corresponding to different constellation diagrams in the at least one constellation diagram may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can determine the first constellation diagram from the at least one constellation diagram according to the index corresponding to the first constellation diagram.
  • the at least one may be one, two, three or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the at least one constellation diagram may also be called a candidate constellation diagram, a set of candidate constellation diagrams, or other names, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Table 1 shows the correspondence between at least one constellation diagram and the index. It is assumed that the at least one constellation diagram includes 4 constellation diagrams, and the indexes of the 4 constellation diagrams are 0-3 respectively.
  • the first indication information may include 2 bits, and the 2 bits are used to indicate the index of the first constellation diagram, and the value of the 2 bits may be 00, 01, 10, or 11. Exemplarily, if the first constellation is constellation A, the value of 2 bits in the first indication information may be 00, that is, index 0 is used to indicate constellation A.
  • the 4 constellation diagrams can correspond to the same number of antenna ports, for example, 4 constellation diagrams can correspond to 2 antenna ports, and 4 constellation diagrams can also correspond to multiple numbers of antenna ports. For example, both constellation diagram A and constellation diagram B Corresponding to 2 antenna ports, constellation diagram C and constellation diagram D both correspond to 4 antenna ports.
  • Constellation 0 (2-bit value of the first indication information: 00) Constellation diagram A 1 (2-bit value of the first indication information: 01) Constellation B 2 (2-bit value of the first indication information: 10) Constellation C 3 (2-bit value of the first indication information: 11) Constellation D
  • the first indication information may be indication information obtained by jointly encoding information indicating the index of the first constellation diagram and other information, that is, the first indication information is used to indicate the index of the first constellation diagram and the other information.
  • the other information may be indication information of a modulation and coding scheme (MCS), and the MCS may indicate one or more of the following: modulation mode, code rate of channel coding, and spectrum efficiency.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the first indication information may be indication information obtained by jointly encoding the MCS and the index of the first constellation diagram, or the first indication information may be at least one of the code rate and spectral efficiency of channel coding and the first The index information of the constellation map is obtained after joint coding.
  • the network device sends second indication information and third indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number of antenna ports M, and the third indication information is used to indicate the corresponding M First constellation map.
  • the third indication information may be used to indicate the index of the first constellation diagram.
  • M since there is a corresponding relationship between M and the constellation diagram, M may correspond to at least one constellation diagram. Therefore, the first constellation diagram The index of is an index within the range of at least one constellation diagram corresponding to M.
  • the terminal device and the network device know at least one constellation diagram corresponding to each M and the index corresponding to each constellation diagram. In this way, the terminal device can determine the first constellation diagram according to the index.
  • a M can be understood as a number of antenna ports.
  • Table 2a and Table 2b both show the correspondence between at least one constellation diagram and the index. The difference is that the number of antenna ports corresponding to the constellation diagrams in Table 2a and Table 2b are different. Assume that the constellation diagram in Table 2a corresponds to 2 antenna ports, and the constellation diagram in Table 2b corresponds to 4 antenna ports. The constellation diagrams corresponding to the two antenna ports in Table 2a are represented by indexes 0 and 1, and the first configured constellation diagram can be indicated from Table 2a through 1 bit of information. The constellation diagrams corresponding to the 4 antenna ports in Table 2b are represented by indexes 0 and 1, and the configured first constellation diagram can be indicated from Table 2b through 1 bit of information.
  • the network device may send the second indication information and the third indication information to the terminal device through joint coding, or it may be described as the network device may indicate the number of antenna ports to the terminal device simultaneously through a fourth indication information
  • the first constellation diagram corresponding to M and M Exemplarily, as shown in Table 3, the possible values of the fourth indication information, and the number M of antenna ports indicated by it and the first constellation corresponding to M are shown.
  • the third indication information may not be needed.
  • M when M can correspond to multiple constellation diagrams, indicating the first constellation diagram within the range of the multiple constellation diagrams corresponding to M can effectively save signaling overhead.
  • M corresponds to 4 constellations, and only 2 bits may be used to indicate the first constellation.
  • the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines the first constellation diagram.
  • the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines N resources for carrying the first bit to be modulated. The method of the unit is explained in detail.
  • the bit to be modulated corresponding to each modulation resource block can be modulated separately.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides two methods (ie, method A and method B) for the sending end device or the receiving end device to determine the occupancy of a modulation resource block Resource unit.
  • the resource units included in one modulation resource block determined hereinafter may be N resource units that carry the first bit to be modulated.
  • a resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block can also be described as a resource unit included in a modulation resource block.
  • the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the time-frequency resource may indicate the number of resource units and the position in the time-frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resources used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can be pre-configured or scheduled by the network equipment for the terminal equipment, such as through DCI, system messages, RRC signaling, multimedia intervention control unit (medium It is sent to the terminal device in the form of access control control element, MAC CE) or broadcast message, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the time-frequency resource can be a time-frequency resource configured for PUSCH or PDSCH.
  • the time-frequency resource can be a PDCCH or PUCCH. Time-frequency resources.
  • the system or communication protocol can specify or default to use only one modulation resource block to carry the bit stream to be transmitted or carry the bit stream obtained based on the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the resource unit included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may be used as a resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted may be used as the first bit to be modulated, or the first bit to be modulated is the bit obtained after the transmitting end device processes the bit stream to be transmitted (for example, channel coding and/or scrambling) flow.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is the number of resource units corresponding to one constellation point.
  • the terminal device does not think that there will be a configuration in which the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted is not equal to the number of resource units corresponding to one constellation point.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted through signaling (for example, RRC signaling, DCI signaling) .
  • the method for the network equipment to indicate to the terminal equipment the time-frequency resources used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted through signaling can refer to the method of RB allocation for PDSCH or PUSCH through DCI in LTE standard 36.212, or refer to NR standard 38.212 for PDSCH through DCI.
  • the PUSCH method for RB allocation, or other resource allocation methods can be referred to, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted and the first threshold.
  • the attribute of the time-frequency resource used for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted includes the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource and the time-frequency domain position of the time-frequency resource.
  • the first threshold is a parameter used for comparison with the time-frequency resource, and it may be configured by a network device or may be predefined. The first threshold is used to determine the number of resource units included in one modulation resource block.
  • the first threshold may be the number of resource units.
  • T is used to indicate that T is a positive integer, such as 1, 2, 4, 8, etc.
  • taking frequency domain units as subcarriers and time domain units as time domain symbols as examples some possible values of
  • a 12, or a is a multiple of 12; a can also take 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6, which are all submultiples of 12, which is good for scheduling.
  • b 1, 2, 4, 7, or 14, etc.
  • 1 is a single symbol, the channel has the smallest change in the time domain in a modulation resource block; 2 and 4 are dual symbols and 4 symbols, respectively, and the channel has a small change in the time domain in a modulation resource block; 7 and 14 respectively It is a half-slot (a type of mini-slot) and a time slot, which is convenient for scheduling, and can be used when the channel in a modulation resource block does not change much in the time domain.
  • the first threshold may be related to the subcarrier spacing. Taking the case where the sub-carrier spacing is 15*2 ⁇ g kHz as an example, the relationship between the first threshold and the sub-carrier spacing will be described. Wherein g is an integer greater than or equal to 0, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • T is inversely proportional to 2 ⁇ g, that is to say, for every doubling of the sub-carrier spacing, T is reduced by half (if T is not divisible by 2, it is divided by 2 rounded).
  • the first threshold is the number a of time domain units and the number b of frequency domain units.
  • b can be related to the subcarrier spacing.
  • b is inversely proportional to 2 ⁇ g, that is to say, the subcarrier spacing is doubled, and the number of frequency domain units occupied by the time-frequency resource b is doubled.
  • the above two designs can ensure that the bandwidth of the frequency domain resource occupied by the time-frequency resource remains unchanged, thus ensuring that the channel on the time-frequency resource does not change much in the frequency domain.
  • a may be related to the sub-carrier spacing, for example, a is proportional to 2 ⁇ g, that is, the sub-carrier spacing is doubled, and a is doubled.
  • a since the subcarrier spacing is doubled, the time domain length of the corresponding resource unit is approximately doubled. Therefore, a doubled a can ensure that the time domain length occupied by a modulation resource block remains unchanged. It can be ensured that the channel on the time-frequency resource corresponding to the modulation resource block does not change much in the time domain.
  • the concept of bandwidth part is defined.
  • a network device configures one or more BWPs for a terminal device in a cell, and can activate one or more BWPs for data transmission.
  • a BWP corresponds to a subcarrier spacing configuration and a section of bandwidth or a section of frequency domain resources in the system bandwidth. Therefore, the first threshold can be configured for a BWP, that is, the corresponding T, or the corresponding a and/or b .
  • the first threshold configured for different BWPs may be the same or different.
  • the minimum of the number of resource units in the time-frequency resource used for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted and the first threshold T can be used as the number of resource units in one modulation resource block.
  • the time-frequency resource does not need to be grouped, and the resource unit included in the time-frequency resource can be used as a modulation resource block Occupied resource unit, a modulation resource block carries the bit stream to be transmitted or bears the bit stream obtained based on the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the time-frequency resource can be grouped to obtain multiple resource unit groups, that is, multiple modulation resource blocks are obtained, each The number of resource units occupied by the modulation resource block may all be T. In the case that the resource units included in the time-frequency resource cannot divide T, the number of resource units occupied by one of the modulation resource blocks can be made larger or smaller than T.
  • the bits to be modulated (for example, the first bits to be modulated) carried by one modulation resource block may be part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, or may be based on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted The obtained bits.
  • the resource units occupied by one modulation resource block are part of the resource units included in the time-frequency resources used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the 10 REs can be divided into two groups to obtain two modulation resource blocks, and each modulation resource block includes 5 REs.
  • the 11 REs can be divided into two groups to obtain two modulation resource blocks, one of which includes 5 REs, and the other modulation resource block includes 6 REs; alternatively, the 11 REs can be divided into 3 groups to obtain 3 modulation resource blocks, where each of the two modulation resource blocks includes 5 REs, and the other modulation resource block includes 5 REs.
  • One RE is included in the modulation resource block.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a modulation resource block according to an embodiment of the application.
  • each small square represents a resource unit
  • every 6 resource units form a modulation resource block
  • two modulation resource blocks are obtained, namely modulation resource block 1 and modulation resource block 2.
  • the resource unit occupied by each modulation resource block can be determined by the method of time domain first and then frequency domain, or by the method of frequency domain first and time domain first Resource unit occupied by each modulation resource block.
  • the two methods are described separately.
  • the resource unit is RE, and suppose that the label of an RE is (m, n).
  • m may represent the subcarrier index of the RE, and may start from 0 along the direction of frequency increase.
  • 0 corresponds to the subcarrier with the lowest frequency domain position in the frequency domain resources of the system.
  • n may represent the index of the time domain symbol of the RE, and may start from 0 along the time sequence.
  • 0 corresponds to the first symbol in the time slot.
  • FIG. 6 shows another schematic diagram of a modulation resource block according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the value range of m is 0-5
  • sequence number k of the RE in the left figure of Fig. 6 is shown in the figure, where REs with sequence numbers 0-5 form one modulation resource block, and REs with sequence numbers 6-11 form another modulation resource block. .
  • the resource unit is RE.
  • the label of an RE is defined as (m, n) with reference to the above method.
  • F0 is used to transmit the bits to be transmitted
  • the symbols corresponding to the same modulation resource block are preferentially mapped on the same time domain symbol or on adjacent time domain symbols, so that the receiving end device can perform the correcting after receiving the symbols of a modulation resource block.
  • the symbols borne on this modulation resource block are demodulated without waiting for the symbols borne on all modulation resource blocks to be received before demodulation. Therefore, it is helpful for fast demodulation.
  • the sequence number k of the RE in the figure on the right of FIG. 6 is shown in the figure, where the time-frequency resources of the REs with sequence numbers 0-5 form a modulation resource block, and the time-frequency resources of the REs with sequence numbers 6-11 The frequency resources form another modulation resource block.
  • the resource unit occupied by a modulation resource block is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, or a modulation resource unit is determined based on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted and the first threshold.
  • the resource units occupied by the resource block can make the resource units occupied by one modulation resource block not too many. Within the coherence time and coherent bandwidth, the channel change between the resource units occupied by a modulation resource block will not be too large. It helps to improve the decoding performance of data in non-coherent transmission, thereby improving the decoding accuracy.
  • the processing process for at least part of the bits of the bit stream to be transmitted can be divided into 4 cases, case A: modulation + resource mapping, case B: modulation + scrambling + resource mapping, and case C: channel Coding + modulation + scrambling + resource mapping, case D: channel coding + modulation + resource mapping.
  • the process of processing the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device and the process of obtaining the first bit to be modulated by the receiving end device are described in different situations.
  • the first bit to be modulated is a partial bit of the bit stream to be transmitted or a bit obtained based on a partial bit of the bit stream to be transmitted
  • the processing procedure of the other bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device is different from that of the transmitting end device for the first bit to be modulated
  • the process of modulating bits is the same, and the process of obtaining other bits to be modulated by the receiving end device is the same as the process of receiving the first bits to be modulated. For brevity, details will not be described later.
  • the processing procedure for the first to-be-modulated bit includes determining the first to-be-modulated bit, the modulation process for the first to-be-modulated bit, and the resource mapping process.
  • the embodiment is divided into two major embodiments, namely, embodiment 1 and embodiment 2. Each step in the entire processing process of each embodiment is described in detail.
  • the implementation Example 1 may determine the first constellation diagram based on method 1 in the foregoing manner of determining the first constellation diagram
  • embodiment 2 may determine the first constellation diagram based on manner 2 of the foregoing manner of determining the first constellation diagram.
  • the P second symbols are P first symbols.
  • the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on the above-mentioned method 1 for determining the first constellation diagram.
  • Step A1 Determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the bit to be transmitted can be divided into multiple groups.
  • the stream is divided into multiple groups of bits, and the number of divided bit groups is equal to the number of modulation resource blocks.
  • the multiple groups of bits correspond to multiple modulation resource blocks one by one, and one modulation resource block carries its corresponding set of bits.
  • any group of bits can be used as the first bit to be modulated; in another possible design, there is no need to group the bit stream to be transmitted, and the bit stream to be transmitted can be used as the first bit to be modulated.
  • the bit stream is repeatedly transmitted, and the number of repeated transmissions is the number of modulation resource blocks. For example, one modulation resource block is used for each transmission, and different modulation resource blocks are used for any two transmissions.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is modulated, and the modulated symbols are mapped to the corresponding modulation resource block.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is used as The bits to be modulated carried by a modulated resource block.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is the first bit to be modulated.
  • the process of determining the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block will be described in detail below.
  • the first bit to be modulated may be a bit carried by any modulated resource block in the following.
  • the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted is denoted as u t
  • the number of modulation resource blocks is denoted as t
  • the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block is denoted as u 0
  • the amount occupied by each modulation resource block The number of resource units is denoted as N 0
  • the number of resource units in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is denoted as N t
  • the first bit to be modulated is the bit corresponding to any modulation resource block
  • the first bit to be modulated is the bit corresponding to any modulation resource block.
  • Step 1 Determine the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block
  • the sending end device can be a terminal device or a network device.
  • the sending end device may be a terminal device. In the following, these three methods will be described separately.
  • the sending end device determines the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block according to the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted and the number of modulation resource blocks used to carry the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the number of bits corresponding to one modulation resource block can be made larger or smaller than the number of bits corresponding to other modulation resource blocks.
  • the number of modulation resource blocks may be indicated by the network device through signaling.
  • the number of modulation resource blocks can also be determined by the sending end device according to the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block and the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted. For example, suppose that each modulation resource block occupies The resource unit is N 0 , and the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is N t , then among them, Indicates rounding up. When N t must be divisible by N 0 , the rounding sign is not required.
  • the sending end device may also determine the number of bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block according to the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted, the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block, and the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted The number of bits.
  • the number of bits corresponding to one modulation resource block can be made larger or smaller than the number of bits corresponding to other modulation resource blocks.
  • This method can be applied to the case where the sending end device is a terminal device.
  • the network device sends to the terminal device resource indication information used to indicate the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block and scheduling information used to indicate resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted,
  • the terminal device determines the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block according to the resource indication information and the scheduling information.
  • the number N 0 of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block and the number N t of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may jointly correspond to the number of bits u t of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the resource indication information used to indicate the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block may be independent signaling, or may be signaling carried in other information.
  • the resource indication information may be signaling in modulation and coding scheme (MCS) configuration information.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the MCS configuration information may indicate the number N 0 of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block through resource indication information.
  • the bits to be modulated need to be modulated by a constellation diagram, and each constellation point in the constellation diagram in the embodiment of the present application corresponds to multiple resource units, so the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block can be understood
  • the modulation mode is expressed by the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block. For example, referring to Table 4, Table 4 shows the relationship between MCS and N 0. MCS can be represented by the index of MCS.
  • the MCS configuration information may also be used to indicate a code rate, where the code rate represents a ratio of bits before encoding to bits after encoding.
  • the MCS is MCS configuration information indicative of one, specific implementation, may be indicated by the MCS and u t N t.
  • a table look-up method can be used.
  • the rows in the table represent N t and the columns represent MCS. Refer to Table 5.
  • Table 5 shows the relationship between MCS, N t and u t .
  • the first row represents different N t
  • the first column represents the index of different MCS, starting from the second column, the second row to the fourth u t represented by a row different MCS indicative of N t is different.
  • N t N 0 and the scheduling information indicated by the instruction information resource determined manner u 0 only schematically illustrated, for example, the terminal device can be determined by the spectral efficiency and u 0 0 N, wherein the frequency efficiency may be used to determine a number of bits carried on the resource unit, MCS may be carried in the configuration information, or, the terminal device may determine the spectral efficiency by U t and N t, and t is determined according to u 0 and u t.
  • MCS index N 0 0(MCS_1) 10 1(MCS_2) 10 2(MCS_3) 20 ... ...
  • the resource indication information used to indicate N 0 is included in the MCS to achieve the purpose of indicating N 0
  • the MCS and N t are used to indicate u t .
  • the terminal device can determine N 0 through other information or independently determine N 0 .
  • the terminal device determines each modulation resource block according to the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block, the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, and the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted. The number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block.
  • the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block + may be predefined.
  • the system or communication protocol predefines the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block as a fixed value
  • the fixed value is 6, the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block can also be indicated by the network device through resource indication information; the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can be the network device through the MCS configuration information Indicated; the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may be indicated by the network device through scheduling information.
  • the system or communication protocol may specify that the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted and the number N t of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can jointly correspond to the number of bits in the bit stream to be transmitted u t , the corresponding relationship can be presented in the form of a table, for example, referring to Table 6.
  • Table 6 the row represents N t and the column represents the index of the MCS.
  • a specific MCS and a specific N t correspond to a u t
  • the first row represents different N t
  • the first column represents the index of different MCS, starting from the second column
  • may indicate u t 20, so that the terminal device may N t u t MCS determined according to the; determining resource block occupied by each modulation according to the resource indication information or predefined manner
  • the network device may determine the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block according to the subcarrier interval, and further, use the resource indication information to indicate the resource unit occupied by each modulation resource block quantity.
  • the purpose is to ensure as far as possible that the channel changes on these number of resource units will not be too large.
  • the number of each modulation resource block here can be compared to the first threshold above, and the network equipment can determine the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block according to the subcarrier interval, which can refer to the above about the first threshold and subcarrier interval. The description of the relationship will not be repeated here.
  • This method may be applicable to the case where the sending end device is a terminal device.
  • the network device sends indication information for indicating the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may be independent signaling or signaling carried in other information.
  • the indication information may be signaling in the MCS configuration information, or, described as MCS configuration information may be used to indicate the indication information, optionally, the MCS configuration information may also be used to indicate the code rate, Optionally, the MCS configuration information may also be used to indicate the modulation mode, which may be understood as the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block.
  • the network device may determine the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block based on the first method of determining the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block.
  • the network device may determine the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block according to the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block and the resource unit for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the network device can also determine the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block, the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, and the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted The number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block.
  • the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block For a specific description, reference may be made to the related description of the second method for determining the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block. For brevity, details are not repeated.
  • Step 2 Determine the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block according to the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block.
  • the transmitting end device may intercept corresponding bits according to the sequence of t modulation resource blocks and the number of bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block, so as to obtain the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block.
  • the to-be-modulated bit carried by the i-th modulation resource block is the [(i-1)*u+1]-th bit in the bit stream to be transmitted to The (i*u)th bit, i is taken from 0 to t-1.
  • each modulation resource block corresponds to 4 bits
  • the bit to be modulated carried by the first modulation resource block is 1000
  • the bit to be modulated carried by the second modulation resource block is 1100.
  • the number of the t modulation resource blocks may be determined in a manner of time domain first and then frequency domain, or may be determined in a manner of frequency domain first and then time domain.
  • Figures 8 and 9 are schematic diagrams of modulation resource blocks according to embodiments of the application.
  • Fig. 8 and Fig. 9 show 12 modulation resource blocks.
  • Fig. 8 numbers the modulation resource blocks according to the frequency domain first and then the time domain, which helps to improve the demodulation performance;
  • the domain mode is the modulation resource block number, which is helpful for fast demodulation.
  • Step A2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • Step 1 Determine the first constellation diagram
  • the constellation diagram is related to the number of antenna ports, the number of resource units, and the number of bits to be modulated.
  • the transmitting-end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 1. For the specific description, refer to the related description of the method 1. I won't repeat it here.
  • Step 2 Determine the first constellation point
  • Each constellation point in the constellation diagram corresponds to a bit value
  • the transmitting end device can determine the bit value of the first bit to be modulated based on the corresponding relationship between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram (ie, the first Bit value) corresponding to the first constellation point, obtain P first symbols corresponding to the first constellation point, and complete the modulation process for the first bit to be modulated.
  • Step A3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • the transmitting end device Based on the obtained P first symbols, maps the P first symbols on the N resource units of the M antenna ports, where each antenna port corresponds to N resource units, and each antenna port corresponds to N first symbols are mapped to the N resource units of, and one first symbol is mapped to one resource unit of each antenna port.
  • the transmitting end device transmits the P first symbols using M antenna ports, and each antenna port transmits N symbols mapped on corresponding N resource units.
  • the matrix corresponding to the first constellation point is denoted as matrix X.
  • the matrix X includes P first symbols. It is assumed that the matrix X is an M*N matrix. For the first symbol in the N column of the mth row, the first symbol in the N column corresponds to N resource units one-to-one, and the first symbol in a column corresponds to one resource unit, and the first symbol in each column is mapped to the corresponding resource unit. The first symbols in the N column are mapped on N resource units.
  • the transmitting-end device may send the first symbol in the N column of the m-th row in the matrix X through the corresponding antenna port, so that the first symbol in the N column of the M row is sent through the M antenna ports in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the correspondence between the N resource units and the P first symbols may be defined by a communication protocol or specified by the system.
  • the N columns of symbols can be sequentially mapped on the resource units determined based on the frequency domain and then the time domain, which is helpful for fast demodulation; or, refer to the left of FIG.
  • the N columns of symbols can also be sequentially mapped on the resource units determined based on the time domain first and then the frequency domain, which is beneficial to improve the demodulation performance.
  • the first bit to be modulated may be part or all of the bits of the bit stream to be transmitted, Map the P first symbols obtained by modulating the first bit to be modulated on one of the modulation resource blocks (denoted as the first modulation resource block), and the resource units occupied by the first modulation resource block are N resource units .
  • the second step in step A1 describes the method of determining the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block according to the number of bits, that is, each bit to be modulated can be carried on the corresponding modulation resource block. Therefore, in the resource During the mapping process, the P first symbols may be mapped on the corresponding first modulation resource block.
  • the first bit to be modulated can be the bit stream to be transmitted, and the bit stream to be transmitted can be Map to N resource units.
  • the process of processing the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device is described in detail.
  • the receiving end device for the received P first symbols, the receiving end device can be based on The first constellation diagram is determined in the manner 1 of the above-mentioned manners for determining the first constellation diagram, or, if the receiving end device is a terminal device, the first constellation diagram may also be determined based on the manner 2, and the first constellation diagram is determined
  • the first to-be-modulated bit corresponding to a constellation point ie, P first symbols
  • the process of determining the first to-be-modulated bit corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram can refer to S240 in method 200
  • the related description will not be repeated here.
  • the process for the receiving end device to obtain other bits to be modulated is the same as the process for the receiving end device to obtain the first bit to be modulated. Repeat.
  • the sending end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 2. This embodiment can be used for uplink transmission, and the sending end device is a terminal device.
  • Step A1 Determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the transmitting end device can determine the number of bits u through the constellation diagram, and determine the first bit to be modulated according to u.
  • the determining the first bit to be modulated includes:
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated .
  • the bit stream to be transmitted including the first bit to be modulated can be interpreted as follows: one interpretation is that the bit stream to be transmitted only includes the first bit to be modulated, that is, the first bit to be modulated is the bit stream to be transmitted; It is explained that the bit stream to be transmitted includes not only the first bit to be modulated, but also other bits. In this case, the first bit to be modulated is a partial bit of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • At least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted may be all or part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; the at least part of the bits Used to determine the first bit to be modulated, the at least part of the bit itself may be the first bit to be modulated, or it may be obtained after processing (for example, channel coding and/or scrambling) the at least part of the bit.
  • a bit to be modulated In all the embodiments in case A, a case where the at least part of the bits themselves are the first bits to be modulated can be used as an example for description.
  • the terminal device may determine the first bit number u corresponding to the first constellation diagram according to the first constellation diagram, and obtain the first bit to be modulated with the bit number u from the bit stream to be transmitted according to u.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted is regarded as the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated with the bit number u is intercepted from the bit stream to be transmitted, and the first bit to be modulated is a partial bit of the bit to be transmitted.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is greater than the number of resource units corresponding to one constellation point, and the time-frequency resource can be Perform grouping to obtain multiple modulation resource blocks (for example, t modulation resource blocks), determine the to-be-modulated bits carried by each modulation resource block according to the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block, and the first to-be-modulated bit is the t Modulate the bits to be modulated carried by the first modulation resource block in the resource block.
  • t modulation resource blocks for example, t modulation resource blocks
  • the process of obtaining t modulation resource blocks refer to the related description in Embodiment 1.
  • the process of determining the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block according to the number of bits u refer to the related description in Embodiment 1.
  • I will not repeat them here.
  • This embodiment can be well adapted to scenarios where complete data cannot be transmitted at one time.
  • complete data cannot be transmitted at one time.
  • the number of bits of a complete service data will be relatively large.
  • transmitting the complete service data at one time may affect the data transmission performance. Therefore, in this case ,
  • the complete service data can be divided into multiple transmissions, and the bit stream to be transmitted can be the service data transmitted at any one time.
  • the terminal device it may not know how many bits of service data can be transmitted currently, and it needs to be Only the relevant configuration of the network equipment can complete one transmission, and the service data transmitted at one time may be part of the complete service data.
  • the constellation diagram sent by the network device can determine the number of bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block, and the number of modulation resource blocks can be determined by other configurations of the network device.
  • the to-be-modulated bits on each modulation resource block in turn, complete a transmission of service data.
  • Step A2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation of the first bit to be modulated based on the corresponding relationship between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram determined based on mode 2. The first constellation point corresponding to the bit value, thereby obtaining P first symbols corresponding to the first constellation point, and completing the modulation process for the first bit to be modulated.
  • Step A3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 For the specific description of this step, reference may be made to the step A3 and the specific description in the above-mentioned embodiment 1. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device is described in detail.
  • the receiving end device ie, the network device
  • the receiving end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on Method 2 of the above-mentioned 2 methods for determining the first constellation diagram, and from the The first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point (that is, P first symbols) is determined in the first constellation diagram.
  • P first symbols the first constellation point
  • the process of determining the first to-be-modulated bits corresponding to the P first symbols from the first constellation diagram reference may be made to the related description of S240 in the method 200. For brevity, details are not described herein again.
  • the process for the receiving end device to obtain other bits to be modulated is the same as the process for the receiving end device to obtain the first bit to be modulated. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the process of processing the first bit to be modulated includes determining the first bit to be modulated, the process of modulation, scrambling and resource mapping for the first bit to be modulated.
  • the embodiment is divided into two large embodiments, namely, embodiment 3 and embodiment 4.
  • each large embodiment is divided into two small implementations Examples are described. Among them, the main difference between the two large embodiments is that, as shown in FIG. 10, embodiment 3 is to perform modulation and scrambling jointly. As shown in FIG. 11, embodiment 4 is to scramble after modulation.
  • modulation and scrambling are performed jointly.
  • the design of the constellation diagram not only considers the modulation of the modulated bits, but also considers the scrambling of the modulated bits. That is to say, the constellation diagram is not only related to the number of bits, the number of antenna ports, and the number of resource units, but also the scrambling parameters. related.
  • the constellation points in the first constellation diagram are obtained by scrambling the constellation points in the second constellation diagram based on the first scrambling sequence, and each constellation point in the second constellation diagram corresponds to P symbol.
  • the first scrambling sequence includes P scrambling elements, the P scrambling elements correspond to P symbols of each constellation point one by one, and each scrambling element corresponds to one symbol respectively.
  • the first constellation diagram is generated based on the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling sequence.
  • the second constellation diagram may be a constellation diagram configured by the network device for the terminal device, defined by the communication protocol or specified by the system, and a new constellation diagram may be obtained according to the second constellation diagram and different scrambling sequences.
  • constellation diagram A is obtained according to the second constellation diagram and scrambling sequence A
  • constellation diagram B is obtained according to the second constellation diagram and scrambling sequence B
  • constellation diagram C is obtained according to the second constellation diagram and scrambling sequence C, as an example
  • the second constellation diagram and the scrambling sequence are used as two input parameters in a function, and a new constellation diagram is obtained through function operations.
  • the constellation diagram A, the constellation diagram B, and the constellation diagram C are all new constellation diagrams obtained based on the second constellation diagram and different scrambling sequences.
  • Both the new constellation diagram and the second constellation diagram can be used to modulate the same bit to be modulated. Both the new constellation diagram and the second constellation diagram correspond to the same number of antenna ports, the number of resource units, and the number of bits. The difference is that the new constellation diagram is also used to scramble the modulated bits. It can be understood that each new constellation diagram can be understood as a constellation diagram obtained by rotating the second constellation diagram through the corresponding scrambling sequence. Taking the first scrambling sequence as an example, it is assumed that the matrix corresponding to each constellation point in the second constellation diagram can be expressed as Ci. The matrix Ci includes P symbols, and each symbol corresponds to a scrambling of the first scrambling sequence.
  • the matrix corresponding to each constellation point in the first constellation diagram can be expressed as Xi, and each symbol in the matrix Ci and the corresponding scrambling element in the first scrambling sequence are calculated (for example, multiplied or calculated). And) the symbols in the matrix Xi corresponding to the new constellation points obtained by obtaining the first constellation diagram.
  • the P scrambling elements of the first scrambling sequence are not completely the same.
  • the P scrambling elements may be different or partly the same.
  • a part of the scrambling elements in the P scrambling elements has one value
  • the other part of the scrambling elements has another value.
  • the first scrambling sequence may be determined based on the first scrambling parameter.
  • the h-th element of the first scrambling sequence can be expressed as:
  • h is an integer ranging from 1 to P
  • c is a pseudo-random sequence initialized and determined according to the first scrambling parameter
  • the length of c is 2P
  • c 2h-1 represents the 2h-1 item in the pseudo-random sequence Element
  • c 2h represents the 2h element in the pseudo-random sequence c
  • j represents an imaginary unit
  • the square of j is equal to -1.
  • nth element of the pseudo-random sequence c can be expressed as:
  • the first scrambling parameter may be c init .
  • Nc 1600
  • x 1 (0) 1
  • x 1 (n+31) (x 1 (n+3)+x 1 (n)) mod 2
  • the first scrambling sequence may be a function of the first scrambling parameter and the number of the resource unit (for example, the number of the time domain unit and/or the frequency domain unit).
  • the number of the unit, c 1 and c 1 are constants, and the number of the resource unit can be an integer, for example, the number of the resource unit can be 0, 1, 2, and so on.
  • the scrambling sequence can also be generated according to other methods, which is not limited here.
  • the first scrambling parameter may be determined according to at least one of the following: the ID of the terminal device (for example, a cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI)), the ID of the terminal device configured by the network device , The number of the time unit (for example, time slot, mini-slot, frame, or symbol) used to transmit the P first symbols or P second symbols, and the number used to transmit the P first symbols or P The number of the RB of the second symbol and the number of the modulation resource block.
  • the first scrambling parameter may be any one of the above, or the first scrambling parameter may also be a linear combination of at least two of the above.
  • the first scrambling parameter a 1 *time unit number+ b 1 * RB number.
  • the time unit number and the RB number may be integers, and a 1 and b 1 are constants.
  • the amplitudes of the P scrambling elements in the first scrambling sequence are the same, and/or the phases of the P scrambling elements are determined according to the first scrambling parameter.
  • phase of the h-th element of the first scrambling sequence can be expressed as:
  • h is an integer ranging from 1 to P
  • c is a pseudo-random sequence determined according to the first scrambling parameter
  • the length of c is 2P
  • c 2h-1 represents the 2h-1 item in the pseudo-random sequence
  • c 2h represents the 2h item in the pseudo-random sequence
  • the first scrambling parameter may be c init
  • c init the manner of determining c can refer to the relevant description above, and will not be repeated.
  • the first constellation diagram needs to be further determined based on the first scrambling parameter.
  • mode 2-A where mode 1-A can correspond to mode 1, and mode 2-A can correspond to mode 2.
  • the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines the first constellation diagram according to at least one of M or N and the first scrambling parameter; or, the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines the first constellation diagram according to u and the first scrambling parameter.
  • the scrambling parameter determines the first constellation diagram; or, the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines the first constellation diagram according to at least one of M or N, the first bit number u, and the first scrambling parameter.
  • the design of the first constellation diagram is determined based on the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling sequence.
  • the constellation diagram related to at least one of M or N and/or u can be understood as the second constellation diagram, and further related to the second constellation diagram and the first constellation diagram.
  • the constellation diagram related to the scrambling parameter is understood as the first constellation diagram.
  • the sending end device or the receiving end device may determine the first scrambling parameter based on at least one of the ID of the terminal device, the number of the time unit, the number of the RB, and the number of the modulation resource block. Scramble sequence.
  • the first scrambling sequence can refer to the specific description of determining the first scrambling sequence above, and details are not repeated here. Since the constellation diagram is obtained according to the scrambling sequence corresponding to the scrambling parameter, it can be understood that one scrambling parameter corresponds to one constellation diagram, and therefore, the corresponding constellation diagram can be determined according to the first scrambling parameter.
  • the first constellation diagram is determined according to at least one of M or N, the first bit number u, and the first scrambling parameter as an example to describe related embodiments of joint scrambling and modulation.
  • the transmitter device or the receiver device may determine the second constellation diagram according to at least one of M or N and/or u, and then determine the first constellation diagram according to the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling parameter. Constellation. For example, the first scrambling sequence is determined according to the first scrambling parameter, and the second constellation diagram is scrambled by the first scrambling sequence to obtain the first constellation diagram.
  • the second constellation diagram can be understood as First constellation map.
  • This method may be suitable for terminal equipment performing uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the terminal device may determine the first constellation diagram through signaling sent by the network device.
  • the network device sends fifth indication information to the terminal device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first constellation diagram, and the first constellation diagram is generated based on the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling parameter of.
  • the fifth indication information may be the first indication information in mode 2, or the second indication information and the third indication information, or the fourth indication information.
  • mode 2 For specific descriptions of each type of indication information, please refer to mode 2.
  • the relevant description of each type of indication information it will not be repeated. The difference is that the first constellation diagram in this manner is generated based on the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling parameter.
  • the network device sends the sixth indication information to the terminal device, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the second constellation diagram.
  • the second constellation diagram may be obtained based on at least one of M or N and/or u.
  • the terminal device determines the first constellation diagram according to the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling parameter. For example, the first scrambling sequence is determined according to the first scrambling parameter, and the second constellation diagram is scrambled by the first scrambling sequence to obtain the first constellation diagram.
  • the terminal device may determine the second constellation diagram according to signaling, and further determine the first constellation diagram according to the second constellation diagram and the first scrambling parameter.
  • the indication mode of the sixth indication information in this design may be the indication mode of the first indication information in mode 2 (for example, the matrix value corresponding to the second constellation diagram, or the index corresponding to the second constellation diagram), Or, the indication mode of the second indication information and the indication mode of the third indication information (for example, the index corresponding to the second constellation diagram), or the indication mode of the fourth indication information (for example, M and the second corresponding to M Joint coding of the constellation diagram).
  • the indication mode of each indication information please refer to the relevant description of the indication mode of each indication information in Mode 2, which will not be repeated. The difference is that in this manner, the second constellation diagram is indicated by the sixth indication information, and the first constellation diagram in manner 2 can be replaced with the second constellation diagram here.
  • mode 1-A and mode 2-A of the first constellation diagram are determined, and the embodiments of the present application are described in detail based on Embodiment 3-A and Embodiment 3-B.
  • modulation and scrambling are performed jointly, and the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 1-A.
  • Step B1 Determine the first bit to be modulated
  • step A1 of embodiment 1 The implementation of this step is the same as the implementation of step A1 of embodiment 1 in case A.
  • step A1 of embodiment 1 for specific description, reference may be made to the description of step A1 of embodiment 1.
  • steps A1 of embodiment 1 for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • Step B2 Modulation + scrambling (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device determines the first constellation diagram according to method 1-A, and determines the bit value of the first bit to be modulated according to the correspondence between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram Corresponding to the first constellation point, P first symbols are obtained.
  • the first constellation diagram is obtained by using the first scrambling sequence to scramble the constellation points in the second constellation diagram. Therefore, the P first symbols are based on modulating and scrambling the first bit to be modulated Symbols obtained afterwards.
  • a new constellation diagram is obtained by using a scrambling sequence to scramble the basic constellation diagram (for example, the second constellation diagram), which realizes the rotation of the basic constellation diagram and different additions.
  • the scrambling sequence can get different new constellation diagrams, which plays a role of pseudo-random.
  • the transmitting end device can further determine the first constellation through the first scrambling parameter used to determine the first scrambling sequence, which realizes non- Interference between different users in coherent transmission is randomized.
  • Step B3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on mode 1-A in the manner of determining the first constellation diagram, or, if the receiving end device is a terminal device, it may also determine the first constellation diagram based on mode 2-A, from The first to-be-modulated bit corresponding to the first constellation point (ie, the P first symbols) is determined in the first constellation diagram, where the first constellation point corresponding to the first constellation point is determined from the first constellation diagram.
  • the process of the first bit to be modulated reference may be made to the related description of S240 in the method 200. For brevity, details are not described herein again.
  • the process for the receiving end device to obtain other bits to be modulated is the same as the process for the receiving end device to obtain the first bit to be modulated. For simplicity, this I won't repeat it here.
  • modulation and scrambling are performed jointly, and the sending end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above-mentioned method 2-A.
  • This embodiment can be used for uplink transmission, and the sending end device is a terminal device.
  • Step B1 Determine the first bit to be modulated
  • the sender device can be based on the indication information sent by the network device in a possible design of Mode 2-A Determine the first constellation diagram, and determine the first bit number u of the first to-be-modulated bits based on the first constellation diagram, or the transmitting end device may be based on the sixth indication sent by the network device in another possible design of Mode 2-A
  • the information determines the second constellation diagram. Since the number of bits u corresponding to the second constellation diagram is the same as the number of bits u corresponding to the first constellation diagram, the transmitter device can determine the first bit number u of the first to-be-modulated bit based on the second constellation diagram .
  • step A1 For the specific description of determining the first bit to be modulated based on u and the bit stream to be transmitted, reference may be made to the related description of step A1 in Embodiment 2, and details are not repeated here.
  • Step B2 Modulation + scrambling (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device may determine the bit value corresponding to the first bit to be modulated according to the corresponding relationship between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram determined based on manner 2-A To obtain P first symbols.
  • the first constellation diagram is a constellation diagram obtained by using the first scrambling sequence to scramble the constellation points in the second constellation diagram. Therefore, the P first symbols are based on modulating the first bit to be modulated and The symbol obtained after scrambling.
  • Step B3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 For the specific description of this step, reference may be made to the specific description of step A3 in Embodiment 1. For brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the processing procedure of the first to-be-modulated bit is described in detail for the transmitting end device.
  • the receiving end device ie, network device
  • the receiving end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on Method 1-A of the above two methods for determining the first constellation diagram, and determine the first constellation point (that is, the P first symbols) corresponding to the first bit to be modulated.
  • the process of determining the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram refer to the related description of S240 in method 200
  • I won’t repeat them here.
  • the process for the receiving end device to obtain other bits to be modulated is the same as the process for the receiving end device to obtain the first bit to be modulated. For simplicity, I won't repeat them here.
  • first modulate and then scramble In this embodiment, first modulate and then scramble.
  • two modes (mode 1 and mode 2) of the first constellation diagram are determined, and the embodiments of the present application are described in detail based on Embodiment 4-A and Embodiment 4-B.
  • modulation is first followed by scrambling, and the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 1.
  • Step B1 Determine the first bit to be modulated
  • step A1 in embodiment 1 The implementation of this step is the same as the implementation of step A1 in embodiment 1 in case A.
  • step A1 in embodiment 1 for specific description, reference may be made to the description of step A1 in embodiment 1.
  • steps A1 in embodiment 1 for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • Step B2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • Embodiment 4 The difference from Embodiment 3 is that the modulation and scrambling of the first bit to be modulated in Embodiment 4 are not synchronized with the scrambling, and the design of the constellation diagram has nothing to do with the scrambling sequence.
  • the transmitter device determines the first constellation based on the above method 1. In the figure, the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit to be modulated is determined from the first constellation diagram, and P first symbols are obtained. For the specific description of this step, reference may be made to step A2 of embodiment 1 in case A, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated.
  • Step B3 Scrambling (obtain P second symbols)
  • the transmitting end device uses the second scrambling sequence to scramble the P first symbols obtained after modulating the first to-be-modulated bit to obtain P second symbols.
  • the second scrambling sequence includes P scrambling elements, the P scrambling elements correspond to the P first symbols one-to-one, and one scrambling element corresponds to one first symbol.
  • the second scrambling sequence may be determined based on the second scrambling parameter.
  • the second scrambling parameter may be determined based on at least one of the following: the ID of the terminal device, the ID of the terminal device configured by the network device, and the time Unit (for example, slot, mini-slot, frame or symbol) number, RB number, modulation resource block number.
  • the second scrambling parameter can be any one of the above, or the second scrambling parameter can also be a linear combination of at least two of the above.
  • the second scrambling parameter a 2 *time unit number+ b 2 * RB number, for example, the time unit number and RB number may be integers, and a 2 and b 2 are constants.
  • Each of the P scrambling elements and each corresponding first symbol are calculated (for example, multiplied or summed) to obtain P second symbols.
  • the i-th scrambled element among the P scrambled elements is a i
  • the corresponding first symbol is x i
  • ⁇ i and They are the phases of the i-th term of the two scrambling sequences. Take i from 1 to 6, j is an imaginary singular number, and the square of the imaginary unit is equal to -1.
  • the P scrambling elements of the second scrambling sequence are not completely the same.
  • the second scrambling sequence may be a function of the second scrambling parameter and the number (and/or the number in the time-frequency domain) of the resource unit used to transmit the P first symbols or the P second symbols.
  • the number of the unit, c 3 and c 4 are constants, and the number of the resource unit can be an integer, for example, the number of the resource unit can be 0, 1, 2, and so on.
  • the amplitudes of the P scrambling elements in the second scrambling sequence are the same, and/or the phases of the P scrambling elements are determined according to the second scrambling parameter.
  • the length of the second scrambling sequence is P, or the length of the second scrambling sequence is greater than P.
  • the length of a scrambling sequence may be the product of the number of resource units occupied by a modulation resource block (or the length of a modulation resource block) and the number of antenna ports.
  • the second scrambling sequence only includes the P scrambling elements.
  • the length of one scrambling sequence may be the product of the number of resource units occupied by multiple modulation resource blocks and the number of antenna ports.
  • the second scrambling sequence includes not only the P
  • the scrambling element also includes other scrambling elements, and the other scrambling elements are used to scramble symbols carried by other modulation resource blocks.
  • the multiple modulation resource blocks may be all modulation resource blocks that carry the bit stream to be transmitted, or part of all modulation resource blocks that carry the bit stream to be transmitted, or All modulation resource blocks carrying the bit stream to be transmitted and modulation resource blocks carrying other bit streams to be transmitted.
  • all modulation resource blocks carrying the bit stream to be transmitted may be one modulation resource block or multiple modulation resource blocks, and one modulation resource block corresponds to the case where the time-frequency resources used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted are not grouped.
  • the multiple modulation resource blocks correspond to the case of grouping the time-frequency resources used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted or repeatedly transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the rotation of the P first symbols can be realized, thereby achieving incoherent
  • the interference between different users in the transmission is randomized.
  • Step B4 Resource mapping, sending P second symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here. The difference is that the P first symbols in step A3 in embodiment 1 in case A are replaced with P second symbols here.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on Method 1 of the above methods for determining the first constellation diagram, or, if the receiving end device is a terminal device, it may also determine the first constellation diagram based on Method 2.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit corresponding to the first constellation point (ie, P first symbols) is determined from the first constellation diagram, where the first constellation point corresponding to the first constellation point is determined from the first constellation diagram
  • P first symbols The first to-be-modulated bit corresponding to the first constellation point
  • the process for the receiving end device to obtain other bits to be modulated is the same as the process for the receiving end device to obtain the first bit to be modulated. For simplicity, this I won't repeat it here.
  • modulation is performed first and then scrambled, and the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 2.
  • This embodiment can be used for uplink transmission, and the transmitting end device is a terminal device.
  • Step B1 Determine the first bit to be modulated
  • step A1 in embodiment 2 The implementation of this step is the same as the implementation of step A1 in embodiment 2 in case A.
  • step A1 in embodiment 2 for specific description, reference may be made to the description of step A1 in embodiment 2.
  • steps A1 in embodiment 2 for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • Step B2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting-end device may determine the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit to be modulated from the first constellation diagram determined based on manner 2, and obtain P first symbols. For this step, reference may be made to step A2 of embodiment 2 in case A, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated.
  • Step B3 Scrambling (obtain P second symbols)
  • the transmitting end device uses the second scrambling sequence to scramble the P first symbols obtained after modulating the first to-be-modulated bit to obtain P second symbols.
  • step B3 in Embodiment 4-A For the specific description, reference may be made to the related description of step B3 in Embodiment 4-A. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated.
  • Step B4 Resource mapping, sending P second symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For brevity, details are not repeated here. The difference is that the P first symbols in step A3 in embodiment 1 in case A are replaced with P second symbols here.
  • the process of processing the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device is described in detail.
  • the receiving end device ie, network device
  • P second symbols are received
  • the P second symbols need to be descrambled using the second scrambling sequence to obtain P first symbols.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on mode 1 of the above two methods for determining the first constellation diagram, and determine the first constellation point (ie, P first symbols) from the first constellation diagram ) Corresponding to the first bit to be modulated.
  • the process of determining the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram reference may be made to the related description of S240 in method 200. For brevity, this I won't repeat it here.
  • the process for the receiving end device to obtain other bits to be modulated is the same as the process for the receiving end device to obtain the first bit to be modulated. For simplicity, this I won't repeat it here.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit can be obtained by channel coding at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, the first to-be-modulated bit is modulated, and the P first symbols obtained after modulation are added. Scrambling and resource mapping are performed on P second symbols obtained by scrambling the P first symbols.
  • the first bit to be modulated may be obtained by channel coding and scrambling at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, modulating the first bit to be modulated, and performing P first symbols obtained after modulation. Resource mapping.
  • channel coding is performed on at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to obtain the first bit to be modulated.
  • Each resource unit group in the t resource unit groups includes multiple resource units, and the N resource units used to carry the first resource to be modulated are resource units in any resource unit group in the t resource unit groups, and t is greater than default value.
  • the sending end device can only use at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted. Perform channel coding.
  • the preset value is an integer value of 1, 2, 3, 4 or larger, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. .
  • the main steps of Embodiment 5 are: channel coding at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated, and jointly modulate and scramble the first bit to be modulated to obtain Resource mapping is performed on P first symbols;
  • the main steps of Embodiment 6 are: performing channel coding on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated. After modulation and scrambling, resource mapping is performed on the obtained P second symbols;
  • the main steps of Embodiment 7 are: channel coding and scrambling at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first symbol Modulate the bit, modulate the first bit to be modulated, and perform resource mapping on the obtained P first symbols.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated, and jointly modulates and scrambles the first bit to be modulated, and the obtained P th One symbol performs resource mapping modulation.
  • the modulation and scrambling of the first bit to be modulated can be realized by designing the first constellation diagram.
  • the constellation points in the first constellation diagram are obtained by using the first scrambling sequence to scramble the constellation points in the second constellation diagram, and each constellation point in the second constellation diagram corresponds to P symbol.
  • the first scrambling sequence includes P scrambling elements, the P scrambling elements correspond to the P symbols of each constellation point one-to-one, and one scrambling element corresponds to one symbol.
  • first constellation diagram For the specific description of the first constellation diagram, the second constellation diagram, and the first scrambling sequence, reference may be made to the correlation of the first constellation diagram, the second constellation diagram, and the first scrambling sequence in Embodiment 3. Description, for the sake of brevity, I will not repeat it here.
  • the first constellation diagram can be determined based on the manner 1-A and the manner 2-A described above.
  • the bit stream obtained by channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted may be recorded as the coded bit stream, and the bit obtained by channel coding the grouped bits of the bit stream to be transmitted may be recorded as the coded bit.
  • modulation and scrambling are performed jointly, and the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 1-A.
  • Step C1 Perform channel coding on at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, and determine the first bit to be modulated
  • way 5-1 is to perform channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted , Group or ungroup the coded bit streams obtained based on channel coding to obtain the first bit to be modulated
  • mode 5-2 is to perform channel coding on the grouped or ungrouped bits in the bit stream to be transmitted before channel coding to obtain a new Of bits (encoded bit stream or encoded bits), thereby determining the first bit to be modulated.
  • the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the method 5-1, at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; when the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the method 5-2, if the Transmission bit stream packet, then at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is part of the bit stream to be transmitted, if the bit stream to be transmitted is not grouped, then at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is the bit stream to be transmitted All bits in.
  • the sender performs channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted to obtain the coded bit stream, and can group or not group the coded bit stream based on whether the time-frequency resources used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted are grouped, thereby, Determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the coding information may include code rate and coding mode.
  • the coding mode can be RM (reed muller) code, repetitive coding, convolutional code, turbo code, polar code, low density parity check code (LDPC) code, etc.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may be more than the number of resource units corresponding to one constellation point.
  • the time-frequency resource may include The resource units are divided into multiple groups, and multiple modulation resource blocks are obtained. Based on this, for a coded bit stream, in a possible design, the coded bit stream can be divided into multiple groups, and multiple groups of coded bits correspond to multiple modulation resource blocks one by one, and the number of coded bit groups is equal to the number of modulation resource blocks.
  • the number of resource blocks, each modulation resource block carries a corresponding set of coded bits, and modulation, scrambling, and resource mapping are performed for each set of coded bits.
  • any group of coded bits is the first bit to be modulated.
  • the coded bit stream can be used as the first bit to be modulated.
  • the coded bit stream can be repeatedly transmitted, and the number of repeated transmissions is the modulation resource
  • the number of blocks, one modulation resource block is used for each transmission, and different modulation resource blocks are used for any two transmissions.
  • the coded bit stream is jointly modulated and scrambled, and the obtained symbols are mapped to the corresponding modulation Resource block.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is the number of resource units corresponding to a constellation point, there is no need to group the coded bit stream and use the coded bit stream as a modulation resource.
  • the bits to be modulated ie, coded bits
  • the first bit to be modulated is the bit to be modulated carried by any modulation resource block.
  • the specific description can be Refer to the process of determining the to-be-modulated bits carried by each modulation resource block in step A1 in reference case A. The difference is that the to-be-modulated bits are coded bits, and the to-be-modulated bits in embodiment 1 are uncoded Bits.
  • the first method and the second method for determining the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block in step A1 in the embodiment are applied to this embodiment At this time, it is necessary to make adaptive adjustments based on the channel coding process of this embodiment.
  • the two methods for determining the number of bits of each modulation resource block are briefly described, and the differences are mainly pointed out.
  • the step A1 of embodiment 1 for determining the corresponding modulation resource block please refer to the step A1 of embodiment 1 for determining the corresponding modulation resource block.
  • the transmitting end device determines the bit corresponding to each modulation resource block according to the number of bits u t of the bit stream to be transmitted, the code rate r, and the number t of modulation resource blocks used to carry the bit stream to be transmitted. Number N 0 .
  • the number of bits corresponding to one modulation resource block can be made larger or smaller than the number of bits corresponding to other modulation resource blocks.
  • This method can be applied to the case where the sending end device is a terminal device.
  • the network device sends to the terminal device resource indication information used to indicate the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block, scheduling information used to indicate the resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, and Code rate information used to indicate the code rate, and the terminal device determines the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block according to the resource indication information, the scheduling information, and the code rate information.
  • the code rate information can be pre-configured, that is, no network device is required to send it to the terminal device.
  • the system or communication protocol may specify that the number N 0 of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block and the number N t of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can jointly correspond to the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the number of bits ut , the corresponding relationship can be presented in the form of, for example, a table.
  • the row represents N t and the column represents N 0
  • a specific N t and a specific N 0 correspond to a ut .
  • the resource indication information and the code rate information may be independent signaling, or may be signaling carried in other information.
  • the resource indication information and the code rate information may be signaling in modulation and coding scheme (MCS) configuration information, and each modulation indicated by the resource indication information in the MCS configuration information
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the number of resource units occupied by the resource block can be understood as the modulation mode for modulating the bits to be modulated.
  • MCS is MCS configuration information indicative of one, specific implementation, may be indicated by the MCS and u t N t.
  • a table look-up method can be used. The rows in the table represent N t and the columns represent MCS.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the terminal device may determine u 0 by spectrum efficiency, N 0 and r. Specifically, the number of bits before coding corresponding to one modulation resource block is determined by the spectral efficiency and N 0 .
  • the number of bits before encoding corresponding to a modulation resource block is equal to the product of the spectrum efficiency and the number of resources occupied by N0 resource units, where the unit of the number of resources occupied by N0 resource units is Hertz*s (Hz*s), and the spectrum
  • the unit of efficiency is bit/s/Hz (bit/s/Hz)
  • the terminal device determines each modulation resource block according to the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block, the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, and the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted. The number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block, where the MCS is also used to indicate the code rate.
  • the system or communication protocol may specify that the MCS used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted and the number N t of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted can jointly correspond to the number of bits u of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • t the corresponding relationship can be presented in the form of a table, for example, in the table, the row represents N t , the column represents MCS, and a specific MCS and a specific N t correspond to a ut . You can refer to the related description in Table 6.
  • the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted is u t
  • the channel coding process of the bit stream to be transmitted by the sending end device can be as follows: If u t is 1 to 2, a repetitive code can be used Transmission; If u t is 3-11, RM code can be used for channel coding; if u t is greater than 12, Polar code can be used for coding.
  • the encoding process converts the bit stream to be transmitted into an encoded encoded bit stream.
  • the transmission bit stream is divided into multiple groups, and multiple groups of bits correspond to multiple modulation resource blocks.
  • Each modulation resource block carries coded bits that are channel-coded using coded information for each group of bits.
  • Each group of coded bits is modulated and added. Interference and resource mapping.
  • the first bit to be modulated is a coded bit obtained by channel coding any group of bits.
  • the coded bit stream obtained by channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted is used as the first bit to be modulated, and the coded bit stream can be repeatedly transmitted.
  • the number of repeated transmissions is the number of modulation resource blocks.
  • One modulation resource block is used for each transmission, and different modulation resource blocks are used for any two transmissions.
  • the coded bit stream is modulated, and the modulated symbols are mapped to the corresponding modulation resource blocks.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is the number of resource units corresponding to a constellation point, there is no need to group the bit stream to be transmitted, and it will be based on the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the coded bit stream obtained after channel coding is used as the to-be-modulated bit carried by a modulation resource block.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit is the coded bit stream obtained after channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • each modulation resource block carries the bits to be modulated in step A1 in embodiment 1 in case A.
  • the bits to be modulated are coded bits or coded bit streams, and the bits to be modulated in Embodiment 1 are uncoded bits.
  • the coding information in mode 5-1 is for the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the coding information here is for the bit stream after the grouping. If the bit stream to be transmitted is not grouped, the coding information here is the coding information for the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • Step C2 Modulation + scrambling (obtain P first symbols)
  • step B2 in embodiment 3-A in case B.
  • step B2 in embodiment 3-A in case B.
  • step B2 in embodiment 3-A in case B.
  • Step C3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated is described in detail for the transmitting end device. It should be understood that when the first bit to be modulated is one group of the bit stream packets to be transmitted, the bits are encoded bits after channel encoding, or when the first to-be-modulated bit is a group of encoded bits of an encoded bit stream group obtained by channel-encoding the bit stream to be transmitted, the sending end device processes other bits to be modulated The process is the same as the processing process of the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device, and the processing of the bit stream to be transmitted is completed. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on method 1-A in the manner of determining the first constellation diagram, or, if the receiving end device is a terminal device, It is also possible to determine the first constellation diagram based on Manner 2-A, determine the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point (that is, P first symbols) from the first constellation diagram, and, according to the coding information and the The first bit to be modulated obtains uncoded bits.
  • P first symbols the first constellation point
  • the first bit to be modulated obtains uncoded bits.
  • the transmitting end device is to group the encoded bit stream after channel encoding the bit stream to be transmitted based on Method 5-1, for the receiving end device, it needs to obtain all modulation resource blocks (for example, t modulation resource blocks) to be modulated carried Bit, the to-be-modulated bits carried by all modulation resource blocks are integrated into a coded bit stream, and the coded bit stream is decoded using the coding information used by the transmitting end device for channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted, thereby obtaining the uncoded bit stream to be transmitted Bitstream.
  • the coding information for decoding the first bit to be modulated may be coding information used by the transmitting end device to perform channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the receiving end device decodes the to-be-modulated bits carried by each modulation resource block using the coding information that the sender device performs channel coding on each group of bits, so as to obtain Each group of bits is encoded, thereby obtaining an unencoded bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the coding information that the receiving end device decodes the to-be-modulated bits carried by each modulation resource block is the coding information that the receiving end device uses the sending end device to channel-encode each group of bits.
  • modulation and scrambling are performed jointly, and the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 2-A.
  • This embodiment can be used for uplink transmission, and the transmitting end device is a terminal device.
  • the sender device can be based on the indication information sent by the network device in a possible design of Mode 2-A Determine the first constellation diagram, and determine the first bit number u of the first to-be-modulated bits based on the first constellation diagram, or the transmitting end device may be based on the sixth indication sent by the network device in another possible design of Mode 2-A The information determines the second constellation diagram.
  • the transmitting end device can determine the first bit number u of the first to-be-modulated bit based on the second constellation diagram , Determine the first bit to be modulated, perform joint modulation and scrambling on the first bit to be modulated, and perform resource mapping on the obtained P first symbols.
  • Step C1 Perform channel coding on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, and determine the first bit to be modulated
  • the determining the first bit to be modulated includes:
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated .
  • At least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted are used to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • At least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted may be all or part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; the at least part of the bits is used to determine the first bit to be modulated, and may be after channel coding is performed on the at least part of the bits Obtain the first bit to be modulated.
  • the sending end device performs channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted according to the coding information to obtain the coded bit stream.
  • the instructions of the network device for example, the fifth instruction information or the sixth instruction information sent by the network device.
  • Indication information Determine the first constellation diagram, determine the corresponding first bit number u based on the first constellation diagram, and obtain the first bit to be modulated with the bit number u from the coded bit stream: when u is equal to the coded bit stream When the number of bits is u x , the coded bit stream is regarded as the first bit to be modulated; when u is less than the number of bits u t of the coded bit stream, the coded bits with the number of bits u are intercepted from the coded bit stream.
  • a bit to be modulated is the coded bit.
  • intercepting the coded bits with the number of bits u from the coded bit stream please refer to the relevant description of step A1 in Embodiment 2. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. The difference is that the above The bit stream to be transmitted is analogous to the coded bit stream here.
  • the sender device determines the first constellation diagram based on the manner 2-A according to the instructions of the network device (for example, the fifth instruction information or the sixth instruction information sent by the network device), and determines the corresponding constellation diagram based on the first constellation diagram.
  • the first number of bits u; according to u and the code rate r, determine the number of uncoded bits u p , where u p u*r.
  • the coded bit stream after channel coding based on the bit stream to be transmitted is determined as the first bit to be modulated; if u p is less than the bit stream to be transmitted If the number of bits is u t , the bits with the number of bits u p are intercepted from the transmission bit stream, and the intercepted bits are channel-coded according to the coding information to obtain coded bits, which are the first bits to be modulated.
  • intercepting the bits with the number of bits u p from the transmission bit stream refer to the related description of step A1 in Embodiment 2. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. The difference is that the number of bits in the above The number of bits u analogous to here is u p .
  • Step C2 Modulation + scrambling (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting-end device may determine the bit value corresponding to the first bit to be modulated according to the corresponding relationship between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram determined based on the above method 2-A For the first constellation point, P first symbols are obtained.
  • the first constellation diagram is obtained by using the first scrambling sequence to scramble the constellation points in the second constellation diagram. Therefore, the P first symbols are based on modulating and scrambling the first bit to be modulated Symbols obtained afterwards.
  • Step C3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the process of processing the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting device is described in detail. It should be understood that when the first bit to be modulated is one of the packets of the bit stream to be transmitted When a group of bits is channel-coded encoded bits, or when the first to-be-modulated bit is a group of encoded bits of an encoded bit stream group obtained by channel-coding the to-be-transmitted bit stream, the transmitting end device responds to other The processing procedure of the modulated bit is the same as the processing procedure of the first to-be-modulated bit by the transmitting end device, and the processing of the bit stream to be transmitted is completed. For brevity, details are not described here.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on method 1-A in the manner of determining the first constellation diagram, from In the first constellation diagram, the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point (ie, P first symbols) is determined, and uncoded bits are obtained according to the coding information and the first bit to be modulated.
  • the process of determining the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram reference may be made to the related description of S240 in the method 200, and the sending end device determines two bits of the first bit to be modulated. In this manner, for the specific description of the relevant content decoded by the receiving end device, reference may be made to the description of the relevant content decoded by the receiving end device in Embodiment 5-A. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated, modulates the first bit to be modulated, and modulates the P first symbols obtained after modulation. Perform scrambling, and perform resource mapping on the P second symbols obtained after scrambling.
  • Embodiment 6-A and Embodiment 6-B will be described in detail.
  • modulation is first followed by scrambling, and the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 1.
  • Step C1 Perform channel coding on at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, and determine the first bit to be modulated
  • step C1 in Embodiment 5-A The implementation of this step is the same as the implementation of step C1 in Embodiment 5-A.
  • step C1 in Embodiment 5-A For a specific description, reference may be made to the related description of step C1 in Embodiment 5-A. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated.
  • Step C2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on the foregoing manner 1, determine the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit to be modulated from the first constellation diagram, and obtain P first symbols.
  • step A2 For the specific description of this step, reference may be made to the related description of step A2 in embodiment 1 in case A. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • Step C3 Scrambling (obtain P second symbols)
  • the transmitting end device uses the second scrambling sequence to scramble the P first symbols obtained after modulating the first to-be-modulated bit to obtain P second symbols.
  • step B3 for the specific description of this step, reference may be made to the related description of step B3 in Embodiment 4-A. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • Step C4 Resource mapping, sending P second symbols.
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here. The difference is that the P first symbols in step A3 in embodiment 1 in case A are replaced with P second symbols here.
  • the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device is described in detail. It should be understood that when the first bit to be modulated is a packet of the bit stream to be transmitted When a group of bits is channel-coded encoded bits, or when the first to-be-modulated bit is a group of encoded bits of an encoded bit stream group obtained by channel-coding the to-be-transmitted bit stream, the transmitting end device sends other
  • the processing procedure of the bit to be modulated is the same as the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device, and the processing of the bit stream to be transmitted is completed. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end device After receiving the P second symbols, it needs to use the second scrambling sequence to descramble the P second symbols to obtain P first symbols.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on mode 1 of the manners of determining the first constellation diagram, or, if the receiving end device is a terminal device, it may also determine the first constellation diagram based on mode 2, and then The first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point (ie, P first symbols) is determined in the first constellation diagram.
  • the receiving end device obtains uncoded bits according to the coding information and the first bit to be modulated.
  • modulation is performed first and then scrambled, and the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 2.
  • This embodiment can be used for uplink transmission, and the transmitting end device is a terminal device.
  • Step C1 Perform channel coding on at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, and determine the first bit to be modulated
  • step C1 in Embodiment 5-B The implementation of this step is the same as the implementation of step C1 in Embodiment 5-B.
  • step C1 in Embodiment 5-B For specific description, reference may be made to the related description of step C1 in Embodiment 5-B. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated.
  • Step C2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device determines the first constellation point corresponding to the first bit to be modulated according to the corresponding relationship between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram obtained from the first constellation diagram obtained based on mode 2, Obtain P first symbols.
  • step A2 of embodiment 2 for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated.
  • Step C3 Scrambling (obtain P second symbols)
  • the transmitting end device uses the second scrambling sequence to scramble the P first symbols obtained after modulating the first to-be-modulated bit to obtain P second symbols.
  • step B3 for the specific description of this step, reference may be made to the related description of step B3 in Embodiment 4-A. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • Step C4 Resource mapping, sending P second symbols,
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here. The difference is that the P first symbols in step A3 in embodiment 1 in case A are replaced with P second symbols here.
  • the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device is described in detail. It should be understood that when the first bit to be modulated is a packet of the bit stream to be transmitted When a group of bits is channel-coded encoded bits, or when the first to-be-modulated bit is a group of encoded bits of an encoded bit stream group obtained by channel-coding the to-be-transmitted bit stream, the transmitting end device sends other
  • the processing procedure of the bit to be modulated is the same as the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting end device, and the processing of the bit stream to be transmitted is completed. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end device For the receiving end device (ie, the network device), after receiving the P second symbols, it needs to use the second scrambling sequence to descramble the P second symbols to obtain P first symbols.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on mode 1 of the above two methods for determining the first constellation diagram, and determine the first constellation point (ie, P first symbols) from the first constellation diagram ) Corresponding to the first bit to be modulated.
  • the receiving end device obtains uncoded bits according to the coding information and the first bit to be modulated.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding and scrambling on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated, and modulates the first bit to be modulated, and obtains P first bits. Symbol for resource mapping.
  • bit stream obtained by channel coding and scrambling the bit stream to be transmitted can be recorded as the coded scrambled bit stream, and the bits after the bit stream to be transmitted are grouped by channel coding and scrambling.
  • the obtained bits are recorded as coded scrambled bits.
  • Embodiment 7-A and Embodiment 7-B will be described in detail.
  • first scrambling and then modulating, the transmitting end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 1.
  • Step C1 Perform channel coding and scrambling on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, and determine the first bit to be modulated
  • way 7-1 there can be two ways (namely, way 7-1 and way 7-2) to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • way 7-1 is to channel the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • mode 7-2 is to group or not group the bit stream to be transmitted before channel coding
  • the bits are channel-encoded and scrambled to obtain new bits (encoded scrambled bit stream or encoded scrambled bits) to determine the first bit to be modulated.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; when the first bit to be modulated is determined based on the method 7-2 , If the bit stream to be transmitted is grouped, at least some of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted are part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; if the bit stream to be transmitted is not grouped, the bit stream to be transmitted is At least some bits are all the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • Mode 7-1 grouping or not grouping after encoding and scrambling
  • the transmitting end device performs channel encoding on the bit stream to be transmitted to obtain an encoded bit stream, scrambles the encoded bit stream to obtain an encoded scrambled bit stream, which can be based on whether it will be used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted In the case of grouping the time-frequency resources of the stream, the coded scrambled bit stream is grouped or not grouped, thereby determining the first bit to be modulated.
  • the resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted may be more than the number of resource units corresponding to one constellation point
  • the resource units included in the time-frequency resource may be divided into Multiple groups, multiple modulation resource blocks are obtained.
  • the coded scrambled bit stream can be divided into multiple groups, and the multiple groups of coded scrambled bits correspond to multiple modulation resource blocks one by one, and the coded
  • the number of scrambling bit groups is equal to the number of modulation resource blocks, each modulation resource block carries a corresponding set of coded scrambling bits, and modulation and resource mapping are performed for each group of coded scrambling bits.
  • any group of coded scrambling bits is the first bit to be modulated.
  • there is no need to group the coded and scrambled bitstream and the coded and scrambled bitstream can be used as the first bit to be modulated, and the coded and scrambled bitstream can be repeatedly transmitted, and the number of repeated transmissions is Modulate the number of resource blocks.
  • One modulation resource block is used for each transmission, and different modulation resource blocks are used for any two transmissions. In each transmission, the coded and scrambled bit stream is modulated, and the modulated symbols are mapped to the corresponding modulation resource block.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is the number of resource units corresponding to a constellation point, there is no need to group the coded and scrambled bitstream, and the coded and scrambled bitstream is used as A bit to be modulated carried by a modulation resource block, where the coded scrambled bit stream is the first bit to be modulated.
  • each modulation resource block For the case of grouping coded and scrambled bit streams, it is necessary to determine the bits to be modulated (ie, coded and scrambled bits) carried by each modulation resource block, where the first bit to be modulated is the bit to be modulated carried by any modulation resource block . Since scrambling the coded bit stream does not affect the number of bits corresponding to each modulation resource block, for the specific description of determining the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block, refer to step C1 in Embodiment 5-A Regarding the process of determining that each modulation resource block carries the bits to be modulated, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • bits to be modulated are coded scrambled bits
  • bits to be modulated in Embodiment 5-A are coded bits.
  • the bits to be modulated in step C1 in Embodiment 5-A are coded bits.
  • the coded bit stream is marked as b
  • the coded bit stream is scrambled with the scrambling sequence c
  • the resulting coded bit stream is marked as
  • the length of the scrambling sequence c is the same as the number of bits u x of the coded bit stream b.
  • Each bit of the coded bit stream b and each scrambling element of the scrambling sequence c are summed modulo 2 to obtain the scrambled Coded scrambled bitstream
  • the nth element in is:
  • c is a scrambling sequence, which can be a scrambling sequence in the LTE standard or NR standard, or other scrambling sequences.
  • c is a pseudo-random sequence obtained according to the radio network temporary identity (RNTI) (denoted as n RNTI ) and n ID of the terminal device.
  • the pseudo-random sequence can be used as a scrambling sequence. Therefore, c It is also a scrambling sequence, n ID is the ID of the terminal device configured by the network device or the ID in the physical cell, b(n) represents the nth element in the coded bitstream b, and c(n) represents the scrambling sequence c The nth element. mod means modulo operation.
  • n RNTI ⁇ 2 15 + n ID is determined by c init c init, described with reference to the correlation c init determined based on c (n), where, n ID ⁇ ⁇ 0,1, ... , 1023 ⁇ , or, Indicates the cell ID.
  • the length of the scrambling sequence may be equal to the coded bit stream obtained by channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted The number of bits.
  • the resource units included in the time-frequency resource for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted need to be divided into multiple groups to obtain multiple modulations.
  • the bit stream to be transmitted can be divided into multiple groups, and multiple groups of bits correspond to multiple modulation resource blocks one by one, and the number of groups of bit groups is equal to the number of modulation resource blocks.
  • Each modulation resource block carries coded scrambling bits after channel coding and scrambling of a corresponding group of bits, and modulation and resource mapping are performed for each group of coded scrambling bits.
  • the first bit to be modulated is a coded scrambled bit obtained by performing channel coding and scrambling on any group of bits.
  • the scrambled bit stream is repeatedly transmitted, and the number of repeated transmissions is the number of modulation resource blocks.
  • One modulation resource block should be used for each transmission, and different modulation resource blocks should be used for any two transmissions.
  • the coded scrambled bit stream is modulated, and the modulated symbols are mapped to the corresponding modulation resource block.
  • the number of resource units included in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted is the number of resource units corresponding to a constellation point, there is no need to group the bit stream to be transmitted, and the channel can be based on the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the coded scrambled bit stream obtained after encoding and scrambling is used as the to-be-modulated bit carried by a modulation resource block.
  • the first to-be-modulated bit is the coded and scrambled bit obtained by channel coding and scrambling the bit stream to be transmitted flow.
  • each modulation resource block For the case of grouping bit streams to be transmitted, it is necessary to determine the bits to be modulated (ie, coded scrambled bits or coded scrambled bit streams) carried by each modulation resource block, where the first bit to be modulated is any modulation resource
  • the coded scrambled bits or coded scrambled bit streams carried by the block for specific description, please refer to the process of determining that each modulation resource block carries the bits to be modulated in step A1 in embodiment 1 in case A.
  • the bits to be modulated here are coded scrambled bits or coded scrambled bit streams, and the bits to be modulated in Embodiment 1 are uncoded bits.
  • the length of the scrambling sequence may be less than or equal to the number of bits of the coded bit stream obtained after channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted : If not grouped before encoding, the first bit to be modulated is a coded scrambled bit stream based on channel coding and scrambling the bit stream to be transmitted, and the length of the scrambling sequence can be equal to channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted The number of bits in the encoded bit stream obtained afterwards; if grouping before encoding, the first to-be-modulated bit is based on the coded scrambling bits that are channel-encoded and scrambled for some bits in the to-be-transmitted bit stream, the scrambling sequence
  • the length of can be less than the number of bits of the coded bit stream, and can be equal to the number of coded bits obtained after channel coding the partial bits.
  • Step C2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation corresponding to the first bit to be modulated from the first constellation diagram determined based on the above method 1, and according to the correspondence between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram Click to get P first symbols.
  • step A2 the related description of step A2 in embodiment 1 in case A.
  • step A2 the related description of step A2 in embodiment 1 in case A.
  • Step C3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the process of processing the first bit to be modulated by the transmitting device is described in detail. It should be understood that when the first bit to be modulated is one of the packets of the bit stream to be transmitted When a group of bits are channel-encoded and scrambled, the coded scrambled bits, or when the first bit to be modulated is one of the coded and scrambled bit stream packets obtained by channel coding and scrambling the bit stream to be transmitted When group coding scrambled bits, the processing process of the transmitting end device for other bits to be modulated is the same as the processing process of the transmitting end device for the first bit to be modulated. The processing for the bit stream to be transmitted is completed. Repeat.
  • the receiving end device may determine the first constellation diagram based on Method 1 in the manner of determining the first constellation diagram, or if the receiving end device is The terminal device may also determine the first constellation diagram based on manner 2, and determine the first to-be-modulated bit corresponding to the first constellation point (ie, P first symbols) from the first constellation diagram; and, according to the addition
  • the scrambling sequence and the coding information respectively descramble and decode the first bit to be modulated to obtain uncoded bits.
  • the coded scrambled bit stream is grouped, because the coded bit stream is grouped or not, the length of the scrambled sequence can be equal to the coded bit The number of bits of the stream. Moreover, for the receiving end device, it is necessary to obtain the to-be-modulated bits carried by all modulation resource blocks (for example, t modulation resource blocks), and to integrate the to-be-modulated bits carried by all the modulation resource blocks into one coded and scrambled bit stream.
  • modulation resource blocks for example, t modulation resource blocks
  • the coding information and the scrambled scrambling sequence used by the transmitting end device to perform channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted descramble and decode the coded and scrambled bit stream, thereby obtaining an uncoded bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the scrambling sequence and coding information for descrambling and decoding the first bit to be modulated may be the coding information and the scrambled coding information used by the transmitting end device to perform channel coding on the bit stream to be transmitted. Scramble sequence.
  • the length of the scrambling sequence can be less than or equal to the number of bits in the coded bit stream obtained after channel coding the bit stream to be transmitted:
  • the first bit to be modulated is a coded scrambled bit stream based on channel coding and scrambling of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the length of the scrambling sequence may be equal to the number of bits of the coded bit stream;
  • Grouping, the first bit to be modulated is a coded scrambling bit based on channel coding and scrambling some bits in the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the length of the scrambling sequence can be less than the number of bits in the coded bit stream, and can be equal to The number of coded bits obtained after channel coding of this part of bits.
  • the receiving end device uses the coding information for channel coding each group of bits by the transmitting end device and the scrambling sequence for scrambling each group of bits to descramble and decode the to-be-modulated bits carried by each modulation resource block, thereby obtaining Each group of uncoded bits, thereby obtaining an uncoded bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the scrambling sequence used by the receiving device to descramble the bits to be modulated carried by each modulation resource block is the scrambling sequence used by the receiving device to scramble each group of bits using the transmitting device.
  • the encoding information that the receiving end device decodes the to-be-modulated bits carried by each modulation resource block is the encoding information that the receiving end device uses the transmitting end device to channel-encode each group of bits.
  • the sending end device can determine the first constellation diagram based on the above method 2.
  • This embodiment can be used for uplink transmission, and the sending end device is a terminal device. .
  • Step C1 Perform channel coding and scrambling on at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted, and determine the first bit to be modulated
  • the determining the first bit to be modulated includes:
  • the bit stream to be transmitted includes the first bit to be modulated, or at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted is used to determine the first bit to be modulated .
  • At least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted may be all or part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted; the at least part of the bits is used to determine the first bit to be modulated, and may be channel coding and adding to the at least part of the bits. After scrambling, the first bit to be modulated is obtained.
  • Embodiment 7-A In the process of determining the first bit to be modulated according to the first bit number u and the bit stream to be transmitted, you can refer to Embodiment 7-A. In this step, there can also be two ways (ie, mode 7-3). And mode 7-4) determining the first bit to be modulated, the main difference between the two modes is similar to the main difference between mode 7-1 and mode 7-2 in Embodiment 7-A.
  • the transmitting end device performs channel coding and scrambling on the bit stream to be transmitted according to the coding information and the scrambling sequence to obtain the coded scrambled bit stream.
  • the first constellation diagram is determined based on the instructions of the network device.
  • the first constellation determines the corresponding first bit number u, and obtains the first bit to be modulated with the bit number u from the coded scrambled bit stream: when u is equal to the bit number of the coded scrambled bit stream, The coded scrambled bit stream is used as the first bit to be modulated; when u is less than the number of bits of the coded scrambled bit stream, the coded scrambled bit with the number of bits u is intercepted from the coded scrambled bit stream, and the first to be modulated The modulation bit is the coded scrambled bit.
  • step A1 For the specific description of the coded scrambled bits whose bit number u is intercepted from the coded scrambled bit stream, reference may be made to the related description of step A1 in Embodiment 2. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. The difference is that The bit stream to be transmitted above is analogous to the coded scrambled bit stream here.
  • the bit stream is determined as the first bit to be modulated.
  • the bits with the number of bits u p are intercepted from the transmission bit stream, and then channel coding and scrambling are performed on the intercepted bits according to the coding information and the scrambling sequence , Obtain the coded scrambled bit, the coded scrambled bit is the first bit to be modulated.
  • intercepting the bits with the number of bits u p from the transmission bit stream refer to the related description of step A1 in Embodiment 2. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. The difference is that the number of bits u The number of bits analogously here is u p .
  • Step C2 Modulation (obtain P first symbols)
  • the transmitting end device may determine the first constellation corresponding to the first bit to be modulated according to the corresponding relationship between each constellation point and each bit value in the first constellation diagram determined based on the above manner 2 Constellation point, obtain P first symbols.
  • this step reference may be made to the related description of step A2 in embodiment 1 in case A.
  • steps A2 in embodiment 1 for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • Step C3 Resource mapping, sending P first symbols
  • step A3 in Embodiment 1 in the above case A For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the processing procedure of the first bit to be modulated is described in detail for the transmitting end device.
  • the first bit to be modulated is a coded scrambled bit obtained by channel coding and scrambling a group of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted, or when the first bit to be modulated is the bit stream to be transmitted
  • the processing procedure of the transmitting end device on other bits to be modulated is the same as the processing procedure of the transmitting end device on the first bit to be modulated , Complete the processing for the bit stream to be transmitted, for the sake of brevity, it is not repeated here.
  • the receiving end device For the receiving end device (ie, the network device), for the received P first symbols, the receiving end device may determine the first constellation based on method 1 of the manners for determining the first constellation, and from the first constellation The first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point (that is, P first symbols) is determined in a constellation diagram.
  • the receiving end device respectively descrambles and decodes the first to-be-modulated bit according to the scrambling sequence and the coding information to obtain uncoded bits.
  • the sending end device determines two bits of the first bit to be modulated.
  • the specific description of the relevant content of descrambling and decoding of the receiving end device can refer to the description of the relevant content of descrambling and decoding of the receiving end device in Embodiment 7-A. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the processing procedure for the bit stream to be transmitted includes: Step D1: Channel coding at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated; Step D2: Modulate the first bit to be modulated , Obtain P first symbols; Step D3: Perform resource mapping on the P first symbols.
  • Step D1 Channel coding at least part of the bits in the bit stream to be transmitted to determine the first bit to be modulated
  • Step D2 Modulate the first bit to be modulated , Obtain P first symbols
  • Step D3 Perform resource mapping on the P first symbols.
  • the steps D1 and D2 in the case D For specific descriptions, reference may be made to the related descriptions of step C1 and step C2 in Embodiment 6-A and Embodiment 6-B. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the method for transmitting data in the non-coherent transmission mode is described in detail according to the situation.
  • non-coherent transmission and coherent transmission can coexist in the communication system.
  • the sending end device needs to determine whether to use non-coherent transmission or coherent transmission to send
  • the receiving end device also needs to determine whether to use non-coherent transmission or coherent transmission to receive data. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application also provides a method for determining whether to use incoherent transmission to transmit data. In this way, determining the use of different transmission modes based on different situations can make the data have better transmission performance in different transmission modes. For example, if non-coherent transmission is used when certain conditions are met, the data transmission performance is better.
  • the terminal device can determine the transmission mode based on system regulations or protocol pre-defined or information sent by the network device.
  • the transmission mode includes non-coherent transmission or coherent transmission transmission.
  • the information can be used to indicate the transmission mode.
  • the information may be Boolean indication information, the first value indicates that non-coherent transmission is used, and the second value indicates that coherent transmission is used.
  • the information may be used to indicate a constellation diagram used for transmitting the bit stream to be transmitted, wherein the symbol corresponding to each constellation point in the constellation diagram corresponds to multiple resource units. That is to say, the terminal device can use non-coherent transmission for data transmission by indicating the constellation diagram. Conversely, when the symbol corresponding to each constellation point in the constellation diagram indicated by the information corresponds to a resource unit, it means that the terminal device needs to use finger-coherent transmission for data transmission.
  • this information may be used to instruct the terminal device not to transmit pilots. That is to say, by instructing the terminal device not to transmit the pilot, the terminal device can be instructed to use incoherent transmission for data transmission. Conversely, when the information indicates that the terminal device transmits the pilot, it means that the terminal device needs to use coherent transmission for data transmission.
  • the information may be high-level signaling (for example, radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling, multimedia access control control element (MAC CE) signaling, or physical layer signaling.
  • Order for example, DCI.
  • the network device may determine the transmission mode based on system regulations or protocol pre-defined or other methods.
  • the specific description of the network device determining the transmission mode based on other methods can be determined with reference to at least one of the following items 2 to 8, which will not be repeated here.
  • the sending end device or the receiving end device determines the transmission mode according to the information type of the bit stream to be transmitted
  • coherent transmission may be used.
  • non-coherent transmission may be used.
  • the sending end device or the receiving end device determines the transmission mode according to the channel carrying the bit stream to be transmitted
  • the channel carrying the bit stream to be transmitted is a physical layer control channel (for example, PDCCH or PUCCH), non-coherent transmission may be used.
  • the channel carrying the bit stream to be transmitted is a shared channel (for example, PUSCH), coherent transmission may be used.
  • the transmission direction of the transmitting end device or the receiving end device to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted determines the transmission mode
  • the transmission direction is downlink transmission
  • coherent transmission can be used.
  • non-coherent transmission can be used.
  • the uplink transmission may be the terminal device sending data to the network device, and the downlink transmission may be the network device sending data to the terminal device.
  • the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines the transmission mode according to the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • non-coherent transmission is used.
  • coherent transmission is used.
  • the first value range may be greater than the first value, or, less than the second value, or, greater than the first value and less than the second value.
  • the first value range may be 3-11 bits, or 1-11 bits.
  • the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted can be determined in the following manner.
  • the receiving end device indicates the resource indication information used to indicate the number of resource units occupied by each modulation resource block and the scheduling of the resource unit used to indicate the transmission of the bit stream to be transmitted according to the configuration of the network device The information determines the number of bits in the bit stream to be transmitted. For specific description, please refer to the above-mentioned related description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the number of bits of these specific types of information may be predefined by the protocol or communication system, for example, these specific types of information
  • the information can be feedback information (acknowledgement (acknowledgement, ACK), or negative acknowledgment (negative acknowledgment, NACK)), channel quality indicator (channel quality indicator, CQI) information, etc. Therefore, the receiving end device can determine the number of bits of the bit stream to be transmitted according to the information type of the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • the feedback information includes acknowledgement (ACK) and negative acknowledgement (NACK), and the feedback information corresponds to 1 bit.
  • the channel quality indicator channel quality indicator, CQI
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • the transmitting end device or the receiving end device determines the transmission mode according to the number of antenna ports used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • non-coherent transmission is used.
  • the second threshold is 1 or 2.
  • the sending end device or the receiving end device determines the transmission method according to the number of resource units occupied by the bit stream to be transmitted.
  • non-coherent transmission is used.
  • coherent transmission is used.
  • the third threshold is 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.
  • the number of resource units occupied by the bit stream to be transmitted is the number of resource units used to transmit the bit stream to be transmitted, and the unit may be RE, RB, RBG, etc.
  • the sending end device or the receiving end device determines the transmission mode according to the capability information of the terminal device, and the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports non-coherent transmission or supports coherent transmission.
  • the different capabilities of the terminal equipment support different transmission methods.
  • the network device as the receiving end device or the sending end device may determine to use non-coherent transmission for data transmission based on the capability information reported by the terminal device. Conversely, when the capability information indicates that the terminal device supports coherent transmission, the network device may also determine to use coherent transmission for data transmission based on the capability information.
  • the capability information can be information reported by the terminal device that supports or does not support incoherent transmission. That is to say, when the terminal device reports that it supports incoherent transmission, it is considered that the capability of the terminal device can support incoherent transmission. If the report does not support non-coherent transmission, it is considered that the capability of the terminal device cannot support non-coherent transmission, but can support coherent transmission.
  • the capability information may be the size or maximum value of the number P of resource units occupied by a modulation resource block supported by the terminal device, and/or the capability information may be the number of bits u supported by the terminal device to be modulated.
  • the size or maximum value For example, if P is less than or equal to the first preset value, it is considered that the capability of the terminal device is to support incoherent transmission, and if P is greater than the first preset value, it is considered that the capability of the terminal device does not support incoherent transmission.
  • the terminal device can support coherent transmission; if the number of bits to be modulated is less than or equal to the second preset value, the terminal device is considered capable of supporting non-coherent transmission, if the number of bits to be modulated is less than or equal to the second preset value , It is considered that the ability of the terminal equipment does not support non-coherent transmission, but can support coherent transmission.
  • the sending end device and the receiving end device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module, and the foregoing may be implemented in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • Each function. Whether one of the above-mentioned functions is executed in a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution.
  • modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, which is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • the functional modules in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated In a processor, it can also exist alone physically, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the device 1600 may be a sending-end device, a chip system in the sending-end device, or other devices that can be matched and used with the sending-end device.
  • the device 1600 may be a receiving end device, or a chip system in the receiving end device, or may be another device that can be matched and used with the receiving end device.
  • the device 1600 includes: a transceiver unit 1610 and a processing unit 1620.
  • the device is used to implement the function of the sender device in the above method.
  • the transceiver unit 1610 is configured to use M antenna ports to send P second symbols on N resource units, and not send demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols, and the P second symbols are the P first symbols, or, the P second symbols are symbols determined based on the P first symbols.
  • the processing unit 1620 may be used to implement the method executed by the sending end device described in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 15.
  • the device is used to implement the function of the receiving end device in the above method.
  • the processing unit 1620 is configured to determine the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram.
  • the processing unit 1620 may be used to implement the method executed by the receiving end device described in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 15.
  • the device 1600 here is embodied in the form of a functional unit.
  • the term "unit” here can refer to application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), electronic circuit, processor for executing one or more software or firmware programs (such as shared processor, proprietary processor or group Processor, etc.) and memory, merge logic circuits and/or other suitable components that support the described functions.
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • the apparatus 1600 may be specifically the sending end device or the receiving end device in the foregoing embodiment, and the apparatus 1600 may be used to perform the same as the sending end device or the receiving end device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • Each process and/or step corresponding to the device is not repeated here to avoid repetition.
  • the apparatus 1600 of each of the foregoing solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the sending end device or the receiving end device in the foregoing method; the function can be implemented by hardware, or by software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the transceiver unit may be replaced by a transmitter and a receiver, or may be replaced by other communication interfaces such as interfaces.
  • Other units, such as a processing unit can be replaced by a processor, and execute the receiving and sending operations and related processing operations in each method embodiment respectively.
  • the transceiver unit in the device 1600 can also be composed of a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the function of the transceiver unit can be understood as a receiving operation performed by the receiving unit.
  • the function of the transceiver unit can be understood as the sending operation performed by the sending unit.
  • FIG. 17 shows an apparatus 1700 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the device is used to implement the function of the sender device in the above method.
  • the device can be a sending-end device, or a device that can be installed in or matched with the sending-end device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the apparatus 1700 includes at least one processor 1720, configured to implement the function of the sender device in the data transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 1700 may further include at least one memory 1730 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1730 and the processor 1720 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units, or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1720 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1730.
  • the processor 1720 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1730. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1700 may further include a communication interface.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver 1710 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1700 can communicate with other devices.
  • the other device may be a receiving end device.
  • the communication interface may also be in other forms such as circuits, modules, interfaces, etc., for communication between the apparatus 1700 and other devices.
  • the processor 1720 uses the transceiver 1710, uses M antenna ports, and sends P second symbols on N resource units, without sending The demodulation reference signal of the P second symbols, the P second symbols are the P first symbols, or the P second symbols are symbols determined based on the P first symbols .
  • the processor 1720 may be used to implement the methods executed by the sending end device described in all the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 15.
  • the device is used to implement the function of the receiving end device in the above method.
  • the device may be a receiving-end device, a device that can be installed in the receiving-end device, or a device that can be matched and used with the receiving-end device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the apparatus 1700 includes at least one processor 1720, configured to implement the function of the receiving end device in the data transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 1700 may further include at least one memory 1730 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1730 and the processor 1720 are coupled.
  • the processor 1720 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1730.
  • the processor 1720 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1730. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1700 may further include a communication interface.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver 1710 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1700 can communicate with other devices.
  • the other device may be a sending end device.
  • the processor 1720 uses the transceiver 1710 to receive P second symbols on M antenna ports and N resource units, and does not receive demodulation reference signals of the P second symbols, and the P second symbols
  • the processor 1720 is configured to determine the first bit to be modulated corresponding to the first constellation point from the first constellation diagram.
  • the processor 1720 may be used to implement the methods executed by the receiving end device described in all the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 15.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection medium between the transceiver 1710, the processor 1720, and the memory 1730.
  • the memory 1730, the processor 1720, and the transceiver 1710 are connected by a bus 1740.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 17, and the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 17, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, and may implement or Perform the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), for example Random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM).
  • the memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD for short)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, SSD).
  • the embodiments can be mutually cited.
  • methods and/or terms between method embodiments can be mutually cited, such as functions and/or functions between device embodiments.
  • Or terms may refer to each other, for example, functions and/or terms between the device embodiment and the method embodiment may refer to each other.

Abstract

本申请实施例提供了一种非相干的传输数据的方法和通信装置，在该方法中，发送端设备从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，其中，该第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数，使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第一符号，或，发送基于该P个第一符号确定的P个第二符号，且不发送所述P个第一符号或所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。在该方法中，通过设计星座图，使得星座图中的每个星座点对应多个资源单元，可以不需要通过传输参考信号来传输数据，仅需要传输数据，这样，可以对调度的所有资源单元联合设计，优化维度更高，有效地提高了数据的传输性能。

Description

传输数据的方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2019年03月19日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910207314.1、申请名称为“传输数据的方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，更具体地，涉及通信领域中传输数据的方法和通信装置。
背景技术
目前，已知一种基于相干传输的数据传输方法，在该方法中，发送端设备是以发送参考信号和数据的形式来发送数据的，其中，参考信号用于对数据进行解调。针对数据，发送端设备对该数据进行信道编码、加扰和调制，将得到的调制符号映射在第一时频资源上；针对参考信号(例如，解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS))，发送端设备可以将该参考信号映射在用于传输该数据的时频资源中和该第一时频资源不同的资源上。从而，发送端设备在用于传输该数据的时频资源中发送参考信号和数据。
可以看出，参考信号和数据在不同的时频资源上传输，参考信号的生成与数据无关，在数据传输的优化过程(例如，信道编码、调制或加扰)中，仅会对数据进行优化，但是，数据传输过程需要发送参考信号和数据，参数信号与数据的独立设计使得数据的传输性能可能较差。
因此，需要提供一种技术，可以有效地提高数据的传输性能。
发明内容
本申请提供一种传输数据的方法，可以有效地提高数据的传输性能。
第一方面，提供了一种传输数据的方法，所述方法包括：
从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数，第一待调制比特中包括正整数个比特；
使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，所述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。其中，该第一待调制比特表示调制过程的输入比特。
可选地，所述方法还包括：不发送所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
可选地，该第一待调制比特可以是待传输比特流中的部分比特，也可以是该待传输比特流中的全部比特，也就是说，
待传输比特流可以是未经过物理层比特级处理的当前待传输的比特流。其中，物理层比特级处理可以包括以下处理中的一种或多种：分段、级联、信道编码、速率匹 配、加扰、和添加循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check，CRC等。
可选地，该第一待调制比特可以是发送端设备对该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行处理后的比特，其中，该至少部分比特可以是该待传输比特流的部分比特，也可以是该待传输比特流的全部比特。作为示例而非限定，该发送端设备可以对该至少部分比特进行信道编码和/或加扰，对应地，该第一待调制比特是对该至少部分比特进行信道编码和/或加扰后的比特。
关于该第一待调制比特与第一星座图的关系：该第一待调制比特的比特数为第一比特数u，用于传输该第一待调制比特的天线端口的数量为M，在资源映射过程中，承载该第一待调制比特的资源单元的数量为N，或者说，N个资源单元是一个调制资源块占用的资源单元；对应地，该第一星座图中包括2 u个星座点，每个星座点都对应P个复数调制符号(简称符号)，P＝M*N；每个星座点对应一个待调制比特的取值(简称比特值)，其中，第一待调制比特的比特值(记为第一比特值)对应第一星座点。
这样，该发送端设备可以根据该第一待调制比特的第一比特值从该第一星座图中的多个星座点中确定该第一比特值对应的第一星座点，从而，实现针对该第一待调制比特的调制过程，以得到P个第一符号。在本申请实施例中，在发送P个第一符号或P个第二符号时，发送端还可以对其进行其它处理后进行发送，如层映射、资源映射等处理，本申请实施例不做限制。
可选地，该发送端设备将该P个第一符号映射至N个资源单元上，使用M个天线端口发送。
可选地，该发送端设备对该P个第一符号做进一步处理(例如，对该P个第一符号做加扰处理)得到P个第二符号，将该P个第二符号映射至N个资源单元上，使用M个天线端口发送。
因此，根据本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法，发送端设备将第一待调制比特调制在星座图中的第一星座点上，其中，该第一星座点对应一个M*N的矩阵X。在该方法中，是通过该矩阵X的行向量生成的空间承载该第一待调制比特，这样，可以使得接收端设备不需要知道信道状态信息(即，H)就可以得到矩阵X的行向量生成的空间，从而可以根据该矩阵X解调出该第一待调制比特。因此，在该方法中，可以不需要通过传输参考信号来传输数据(例如，第一待调制比特)。这样，一方面，相比于相干传输中仅在调度的部分资源单元(用于承载数据的资源单元，或者是调度的资源单元中除去传输参考信号的资源单元)上进行数据传输的方式，该方法可以对调度的资源单元联合设计，优化维度更高。例如，优化时，可以考虑提高衰落信道下的吞吐量性能，对抗信道衰落。另一方面，由于不需要传输参考信号，可以节省资源开销，提高了资源利用率，因此有效地提高了数据传输的吞吐量性能，提高了数据的传输性能。
在一种可能的实现中，不发送用于解调所述P个第一符号或所述P个第二符号的参考信号。或者，不发送第一信道的解调参考信号，该第一信道用于承载所述P个第一符号或所述P个第二符号。
在本申请实施例中，可以将一个星座点对应的资源单元称为调制资源块，一个调制资源块占用的资源单元即为一个星座点对应的资源单元。例如，第一星座点对应的 N个资源单元用于传输第一待调制比特，该N个资源单元为一个调制资源块。
在一种可能的设计中，N是基于用于传输所述第一待调制比特的时频资源确定的，或，N是基于用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定的，所述待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，所述待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特。
针对N是基于用于传输所述第一待调制比特的时频资源确定的情况，可选地，系统或通信协议可以规定或默认仅使用一个调制资源块承载该待传输比特流或承载基于该待传输比特流得到的比特流，不需要对该待传输比特流或基于该待传输比特流得到的比特流分组，可以将网络设备调度的时频资源所包括的资源单元作为一个调制资源块占用的资源单元。
针对N是基于用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定的情况，可选地，可以将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源与T中的最小值，作为一个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量。当该时频资源所包括的资源单元的数量小于T时，不需要将该时频资源分组，可以将该用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源所包括的资源单元作为一个调制资源块占用的资源单元。当该用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源所包括的资源单元的数量大于T时，可以将该时频资源分组，得到多个资源单元组，即，得到多个调制资源块，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量都为T。
因此，本申请实施例的传输数据的方法，通过用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元(例如，N个资源单元)，或，通过用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元，可以使得用于一个调制资源块占用的资源单元不会太多，在相干时间和相干带宽内，使得一个调制资源块占用的资源单元之间的信道变化不会太大，有助于提高非相干传输中数据的传输性能。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：
根据M或N中的至少一个，确定所述第一星座图，其中，所述第一星座图中每个星座点对应P个符号。
具体实现中，若通信协议或系统支持的天线端口的数量为定值，例如，M＝1或M＝2，不需要确定M，可以根据N确定对应的第一星座图。若通信协议或系统支持星座图对应的资源单元的数量为定值，同样，不需要确定N，可以根据M确定对应的第一星座图。若通信协议或系统可以支持不同数量的天线端口和资源单元，可以根据M和N确定对应的第一星座图。
可选地，根据M或N中的至少一个和该第一待调制比特的第一比特数u，确定所述所述第一星座图。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一星座图中的星座点是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的星座点加扰得到的，所述第二星座图中的每个星座点对应P个符号。
可选地，该第一加扰序列包括P个加扰元素，该P个加扰元素与该第一星座图中每个星座点的P个符号对应，每个加扰元素对应每个符号。
可选地，该第一加扰序列可以基于第一加扰参数确定，作为示例而非限定，该第一加扰参数可以根据以下至少一项确定：终端设备的ID(例如，小区无线网络临时标 识(cell radio network temporary identifier，C-RNTI))、网络设备配置的终端设备的ID、时间单元(例如，时隙、迷你时隙、帧或符号)的编号、RB的编号、调制资源块的编号。
可选地，该第一加扰序列的P个加扰元素不完全相同。
也就是说，该P个加扰元素可以都不相同，也可以部分相同。
可选地，该第一加扰序列可以是该第一加扰参数以及资源单元的编号(例如，时域单元和/或频域单元的编号)的函数。
可选地，该第一加扰序列中的P个加扰元素的幅值相同，和/或，该P个加扰元素的相位是根据该第一加扰参数确定的。
因此，本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法，通过对基本星座图(例如，第二星座图)采用加扰序列加扰得到新的星座图(例如，第一星座图)，实现了对基本星座图的旋转，不同的加扰序列可以得到不同的新的星座图，起到了伪随机的作用。针对第一待调制比特而言，即使在M、N和u相同的情况下，发送端设备可以通过用于确定第一加扰序列的第一加扰参数进一步确定第一星座图，实现了非相干传输中不同用户之间的干扰随机化。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，L 1＝2 u，u为正整数；以及，
所述方法还包括：
根据u和待传输比特流，确定所述第一待调制比特，所述待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，所述待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特。
可选地，在发送端设备为终端设备的情况中，所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于确定所述第一星座图。
例如，第一信息可以是第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一星座图。
再例如，第一信息可以是第二指示信息和第三指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示天线端口的数量M，该第三指示信息用于指示对应M的第一星座图。
再例如，第一信息也可以是第四指示信息，该第四指示信息同时指示天线端口的数量M和M对应的第一星座图，该第四指示信息可以是基于将M和所述第一星座图进行联合编码生成的。
再例如，第一信息也可以是第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示第二星座图，该第二星座图包括L 1个星座点，L 1＝2 u。这样，终端设备可以基于网络设备发送的第一信息所确定的星座图(例如，第一星座图或第二星座图)确定第一比特数u，根据u和该待传输比特流，获取比特数为u的第一待调制比特。
可选地，在第一信息是第六指示信息的情况下，终端设备可以根据该第六指示信息和该第一加扰序列确定所述第一星座图，采用该第一星座图调制该第一待调制比特。
可选地，当u为该待传输比特流的比特数时，将该待传输比特流作为该第一待调制比特；当u小于该待传输比特流的比特数时，从该待传输比特流中截取比特数为u的第一待调制比特。
因此，本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法，可以很好地适用于一次性无法传输完整的业务数据的场景中。由于一次性无法传输完整的业务数据，针对发送端设备为终端设备 的情况来说，终端设备可能并不知道当前可以传输多少比特数的业务数据，因此，在这种场景中，可以通过网络设备发送的星座图(例如，第一星座图或第二星座图)确定待调制比特(例如，第一待调制比特)的比特数，进而确定待调制比特，从而，完成针对待调制比特的传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一星座图中的星座点属于第三星座图，所述第一星座图包括L1个星座点，所述第三星座图包括L 2个星座点，L 2≥L 1。
其中，L 2＝2 v，v大于或等于u，该第三星座图可以理解为一个总星座图，包括多个子星座图，每个子星座图对应每种比特数，或者说，该第三星座图可以用于确定多种比特数对应的子星座图，每种比特数对应的子星座图中包括该第三星座图中的部分或全部星座点，该部分或全部星座点形成该第三星座图中的一个子星座图，该第一星座图即为该第三星座图中的一个子星座图。
因此，本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法，通过设计包括多个子星座图的总星座图(例如，该第三星座图)，发送端设备可以仅需要保存该总星座图就可以获得不同大小的多个子星座图，有效地降低了存储空间。
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第一符号中每个第一符号的幅值相同，和/或，所述P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的整数倍，S＝2*pi/k，pi为圆周率，k为大于1的整数。
可选地，该P个第一符号可以从特定的k个候选符号中选择，该k个候选符号之间的最小相位差为S＝2*pi/k。
可选地，该k个候选符号可以为QPSK符号。
因此，本申请实施例的传输数据的方法，通过对第一星座图做进一步设计，使得第一星座点中P个第一符号中每个第一符号的幅值相同，和/或，所述P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的整数倍，可以有效地降低数据传输过程的峰值平均功率(peak to average power ratio，PAPR)，提高上行覆盖。
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号，包括：
所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号和第二加扰序列确定的。
因此，本申请实施例提供的传输信息的方法，通过采用第二加扰序列对调制后的P个第一符号进行加扰，可以实现对该P个第一符号的旋转，起到了伪随机的作用，从而，实现非相干传输中不同用户之间的干扰随机化。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：
在确定使用t个资源单元组传输待传输比特流时，对所述待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，以获得所述第一待调制比特，所述t个资源单元组中每个资源单元组包括多个资源单元，所述N个资源单元为所述t个资源单元组中任一个资源单元组中的资源单元，t大于预设值，t为整数。
可选地，该预设值为1、2、3、4或者更大的整数值，本申请实施例不做限制。。
因此，本申请实施例的传输数据的方法，在用于传输待传输比特流的调制资源块(即，资源单元组)的数量t大于预设值的情况下，较多数量的调制资源块所在的信 道的衰落较严重，因此，通过对该待传输比特流的至少部分比特进行信道编码，有利于对抗信道衰落，提高数据的传输性能。
反过来说，在用于传输待传输比特流的调制资源块的数量t小于预设值的情况下，少量的调制资源块所在的信道的衰落不明显，因此，可以不需要对该待传输比特流的至少部分比特进行信道编码，也能获得较好的传输性能。
在一种可能的设计中，待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特，其中，
网络设备配置有用于指示传输所述待传输比特流所采用的星座图的信息，其中，所述星座图中每个星座点与多个资源单元对应；或，
所述待传输比特流为控制信息；或，
承载所述待传输比特流的信道为物理层控制信道；或，
传输所述待传输比特流的传输方向为上行传输；或，
所述待传输比特流的比特数属于第一数值范围；或，
传输所述待传输比特流所采用的天线端口的数量小于第二阈值；或，
所述待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量小于第三阈值。
通过该方法，可以灵活配置使用本申请实施例提供的非相干传输方法，还是使用相关传输方法，从而提高系统兼容性。
第二方面，提供了一种传输数据的方法，所述方法包括：
在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号或P个第一符号，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
其中，关于该第一待传输比特流、该第一星座图和P个第二符号的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
可选地，所述方法还包括：不接收所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
在一种可能的设计中，N是基于用于传输所述第一待调制比特的时频资源确定的，或，N是基于用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定的，所述待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，所述待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特。
其中，关于基于上述两种情况确定N的具体描述参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：
根据M或N中的至少一个，确定所述第一星座图，其中，所述第一星座图中的每个星座点对应P个符号。
其中，关于根据M或N中的至少一个确定该第一星座图的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一星座图中的星座点是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的星座点加扰得到的，所述第二星座图中每个星座点对应P个符号；
所述P个第一符号与第二星座点对应，所述第二星座点是采用第一加扰序列对第 一星座点加扰得到的；
从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特，包括：从第二星座图中确定所述第二星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
其中，关于该第二星座图以及该第一加扰序列的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一星座图中的星座点属于第三星座图，所述第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，所述第三星座图包括L 2个星座点，L 2≥L 1。
其中，关于该第三星座图和该第一星座图的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第一符号中每个第一符号的幅值相同，和/或，所述P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的整数倍，S＝2*pi/k，pi为圆周率，k为大于1的整数。
其中，关于该P个第一符号的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第二符号是采用第二加扰序列对所述P个第一符号加扰得到的符号；以及，
所述方法还包括：
采用第二加扰序列对所述P个第二符号进行解扰，获得所述P个第一符号。
在一种可能的设计中，待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特，其中，
网络设备配置有用于指示传输所述待传输比特流所采用的星座图的信息，其中，所述星座图中每个星座点与多个资源单元对应；或，
所述待传输比特流为控制信息；或，
承载所述待传输比特流的信道为物理层控制信道；或，
传输所述待传输比特流的传输方向为上行传输；或，
所述待传输比特流的比特数属于第一数值范围；或，
传输所述待传输比特流所采用的天线端口的数量小于第二阈值；或，
所述待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量小于第三阈值。
第三方面，提供了一种通信装置，所述装置可以是发送端设备，也可以是发送端设备中的装置，或者可以是其它能够和发送端设备匹配使用的装置，所述发送端设备可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备，所述装置可以包括处理单元和收发单元，所述处理单元和收发单元可以执行上述第一方面任一种设计示例中的发送端设备所执行的相应功能，下面，对各个单元的功能做具体描述。
所述处理单元，用于从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
所述收发单元，用于使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，所述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。
可选地，所述收发单元不用于发送所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
其中，关于该第一待传输比特流、该第一星座图和P个第二符号的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
第四方面，提供了一种通信装置，所述装置可以是接收端设备，也可以是接收端设备中的装置，或者可以是其它能够和接收端设备匹配使用的装置，所述接收端设备可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备，所述装置可以包括处理单元和收发单元，所述处理单元和收发单元可以执行上述第二方面任一种设计示例中的接收端设备所执行的相应功能。下面，对各个单元的功能做具体描述。
所述收发单元，用于在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号，所述P个第二符号是P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
所述处理单元，用于从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
可选地，所述所述收发单元不用于接收所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
其中，关于该第一待传输比特流、该第一星座图和P个第二符号的具体描述可以参考第二方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
第五方面，本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置，所述通信装置包括处理器，用于实现上述第一方面描述的方法中发送端设备的功能。所述通信装置还可以包括存储器，所述存储器与所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于实现上述第一方面描述的方法中发送端设备的功能。在一种可能的实现中，所述存储器用于存储程序指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合，所述处理器可以调用并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令，用于实现上述第一方面描述的方法中发送端设备的功能。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口，所述通信接口用于所述通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地，所述通信接口为收发器、接口、或电路等，所述其它设备为接收端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置包括：
处理器和通信接口，所述处理器用于确定第一待调制比特；
所述处理器还用于，从第一星座图中确定所述第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
所述处理器利用所述通信接口，使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，所述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。
可选地，所述通信接口不用于发送所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
其中，关于该第一待传输比特流、该第一星座图和P个第二符号的具体描述可以参考第一方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
第六方面，本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置，所述通信装置包括处理器，用于实现上述第二方面描述的方法中接收端设备的功能。所述通信装置还可以包括存储器，所述存储器与所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于实现上述第二方面描述的方法中接收端设备的功能。在一种可能的实现中，所述存储器用于存储程序指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合，所述处理器可以调用并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令，用于实现上述第二方面描述的方法中接收端设备的功能。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口，所述通信接口用于所述通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地，所述 通信接口为收发器、接口、或电路等，所述其它设备为发送端设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置包括：
处理器和通信接口，所述处理器利用所述通信接口在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号，所述P个第二符号是P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
处理器，用于从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
可选地，所述通信接口不用于接收所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
其中，关于该第一待传输比特流、该第一星座图和P个第二符号的具体描述可以参考第二方面的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
第七方面，本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，包括指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第八方面，本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品，包括指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，还可以包括存储器，用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种系统，所述系统包括第五方面所述的装置和第六方面所述的装置，或者包括第三方面所述的装置和第四方面所述的装置。
附图说明
图1是一种适用于本申请实施例的移动通信系统的架构示意图。
图2是本申请实施例的星座点的示意图。
图3是本申请实施例的传输数据的方法的示意性交互图。
图4是本申请实施例的星座图的另一示意图。
图5是本申请实施例的调制资源块的示意图。
图6是本申请实施例的调制资源块的另一示意图。
图7是本申请实施例的传输数据的方法的示意性流程图。
图8是本申请实施例的调制资源块的另一示意图。
图9是本申请实施例的调制资源块的再一示意图。
图10至图15是本申请实施例的传输数据的方法的另一示意性流程图。
图16是本申请实施例提供的的通信装置的示意性框图。
图17是本申请实施例提供的的通信装置的示意性结构图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
在本申请实施例中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个 以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“至少部分”可以全部或部分，例如，“A中的至少部分B”可以表示A中的全部B，也可以表示A中的部分B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a、b或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c，a和b，a和c，b和c，或a和b和c，其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。“A属于B”可以表示A是B的子集，也可以表示A的内容与B的内容相同。“A包括B”可以表示B是A的子集，也可以表示A的内容与B的内容相同，或者说，“A包括B”可以表示A包括B和其他内容，也可以表示A中仅包括B。
在本申请实施例中，对于一种技术特征，通过“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“A”、“B”、“C”和“D”等区分该种技术特征中的技术特征，该“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“A”、“B”、“C”和“D”描述的技术特征间无先后顺序或者大小顺序。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通信(global system formobile communications，GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)系统、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信系统、或第五代(5th generation，5G)系统等。其中，5G还可以被称为新无线(new radio，NR)。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于通信设备间的无线通信。其中，通信设备可以包括网络设备和终端设备。通信设备间的无线通信可以包括但不限于：网络设备和终端设备间的无线通信、网络设备和网络设备间的无线通信、以及终端设备和终端设备间的无线通信。在本申请实施例中，术语“无线通信”还可以简称为“通信”，术语“通信”还可以描述为“数据传输”、“信号传输”、“信息传输”或“传输”等。在本申请实施例中，传输可以包括发送或接收。示例性地，传输可以是上行传输，例如可以是终端设备向网络设备发送信号；传输也可以是下行传输，例如可以是网络设备向终端设备发送信号。在本申请实施例中，通信设备间的无线通信可以被描述为：发送端向接收端发送信号，接收端从发送端接收信号。
本申请实施例涉及的终端设备还可以称为终端，其可以是一种具有无线收发功能的设备。终端可以被部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载；也可以被部署在水面上(如轮船等)；还可以被部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备可以是用户设备(user equipment，UE)。UE包括具有无线通信功能的手持式设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备或计算设备。示例性地，UE可以是手机(mobilephone)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑。终端设备还可以是虚拟现实(virtualreality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmentedreality，AR)终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人 驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、智慧城市(smartcity)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smarthome)中的无线终端等等。本申请实施例中，用于实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端；也可以是能够支持终端实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统，该装置可以被安装在终端中。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，可以以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
本申请实施例涉及的网络设备包括基站(basestation，BS)或接入网设备。基站可以是一种部署在无线接入网中能够和终端进行无线通信的设备。基站可能有多种形式，比如宏基站、微基站、中继站和接入点等。示例性地，本申请实施例涉及到的基站可以是5G中的基站或LTE中的基站，其中，5G中的基站还可以称为传输接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)或gNB(gNodeB)。本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备；也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，可以以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
在一种可能的设计中，在本申请实施例中，用于实现终端设备的功能的装置或用于实现网络设备的功能的装置包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层，以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统，例如，Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
另外，本申请实施例的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请实施例中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于:磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
可选地，图1是适用于本申请实施例的移动通信系统的架构示意图。如图1所示，该移动通信系统包括核心网设备110、无线接入网设备120和至少一个终端设备(如图1中的终端设备130和终端设备140)。终端设备通过无线的方式与无线接入网设备相连，无线接入网设备通过无线或有线方式与核心网设备连接。核心网设备与无线 接入网设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备，也可以将核心网设备的功能与无线接入网设备的功能集成在同一个物理设备上，还可以在一个物理设备上集成部分核心网设备的功能和部分无线接入网设备的功能。终端设备可以是固定位置的，也可以是可移动的。图1只是示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备，如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备，在图1中未画出。本申请实施例对该移动通信系统中包括的核心网设备、无线接入网设备和终端设备的数量不做限定。
如背景技术所述，目前的无线通信是基于相干传输的方式传输数据的，即，基于参考信号传输数据的，其中，数据可以是业务数据，也可以是用于无线通信的各种信息，例如，承载于物理层数据信道上的控制信息。其中，该被传输的数据还可以被称为待传输数据。由于在这种传输方式中，参考信号的生成与待传输数据无关，因此，在数据传输的优化过程中，仅会对数据在信道编码、加扰或调制等过程中进行优化，但是，数据传输过程需要发送参考信号和数据，参考信号与数据的独立设计使得数据的传输性能较差。例如，参考信号与数据的传输条件可能不匹配，从而导致根据参考信号解调数据时得到的解调结果错误率高，因此导致数据传输速率较低。
基于此，本申请实施例提出了一种传输数据的方法，在该方法中，发送端设备可以不需要基于参考信号传输数据，也就是说，传输数据过程中不需要发送参考信号，对应地，接收端设备也不需要通过参考信号估计信道状态从而解调数据。这样，可以对数据统一设计优化，相比于现有技术中参考信号与数据未联合优化的非相干传输，本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法可以具有更好的吞吐量性能，从而可以提高数据的传输性能。
其中，发送端设备可以简称为发送端，发送端设备可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备；接收端设备可以简称为接收端，接收端设备可以是网络设备，也可以是终端设备。
为了便于描述，作为示例而非限定，可以将本申请实施例提供的传输方式称为非相干传输。
为了便于理解，首先对本申请实施例涉及的相关术语和技术做一简单介绍。
1、资源单元
资源单元可用于作为资源在时域、频域或时频域的计量单位，在本申请实施例中，可以将资源在时频域上的计量单位表示为资源单元，资源单元可以是例如资源粒子(resource element，RE)或资源块(resource block，RB)等。
RE也可以称为资源元素。在基于正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)的通信系统中，例如LTE或5G中，一个RE在时域上可以对应一个时域符号，在频域上可以对应一个子载波。在本申请实施例中，RE的时频资源可以是资源单元的一例。例如，时域符号可以是正交频分多址(orthogonal frequency division multiple access，OFDMA)符号或单载波频分多址(single carrier frequency division multiple access，SC-FDMA)符号。
一个RB在频域包括
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000001
个连续的子载波。其中，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000002
为正整数。例如，在LTE或5G中，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000003
可以等于12。在本申请实施例中，可以仅在频域上来定义RB，也就是说，不限制RB在时域上占用的时域资源的数量；也可以在时域和频域上来定义RB， 例如一个RB在频域包括
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000004
个连续的子载波且时域包括正整数个时域符号，例如，时域包括7个、14个、6个或12个时域符号。在本申请实施例中，RB的时频资源可以是资源单元的再一例。
2、资源单元组
资源单元组也可用于作为资源在时域、频域或时频域的另一种计量单位。在本申请实施例中，一个资源单元组包括正整数个资源单元。
示例性地，一个资源单元组可以在频域包括正整数个子载波，时域包括正整数个时域符号、时隙或者子帧等，即一个资源单元组中包括正整数个RE。
示例性地，一个资源单元组可以在频域包括正整数个RB，时域包括正整数个时域符号、时隙或者子帧等，即一个资源单元组中包括正整数个RE。其中，一个时隙中可以包括正整数个时域符号，例如7个或14个。一个子帧中可以包括正整数个时隙或者正整数个时域符号。示例性地，在5G中，对于系统中所支持的各子载波间隔，例如15kHz(千赫兹)、30kHz、60kHz、120kHz和240kHz，可以配置一个时隙中包括14个时域符号，并配置一个子帧的长度为1毫秒。由于不同子载波间隔的符号长度可以不同，因此不同子载波间隔对应的子帧中包括的时隙个数可以不同。
在申请实施例中，资源单元组中的资源单元可以是调制过程中一个星座点对应的资源单元，因此，也可以将资源单元组称为调制资源块，在下文中，资源单元组和调制资源块可以替换描述。
3、星座图
星座图用于对待调制比特进行调制。假设，待调制比特(或者称为待调制数据)包括u个比特，由于每个比特的取值可以为0或1，共2种可能的取值，则，该u个比特的取值有2 u种可能，因此，该u个比特对应的星座图中包括2 u个星座点，每个星座点对应多个复值调制符号，2 u个星座点一一对应于该2 u种可能的比特值，每种比特值表示该u个比特的一种可能的取值。u为正整数。在本申请实施例中，正整数可以是1、2、3或者更大的整数。
示例性地，发送端设备可以基于u确定对应的星座图，从该星座图中的多个星座点中，确定该u个比特的取值对应的星座点，从而获得所确定的星座点所对应的复值调制符号。发送端可以将所得到的复值调制符号或基于所得到的复值调制符号得到的复值符号映射至时频资源上进行传输。这里的复值的实部和虚部可以均不为0、其中一个为0或都为0。
这里的星座图还可以认为是一种从比特值到复值调制符号的调制映射，即，对于给定的星座图，可以认为该星座图是输入的比特值和输出的复值调制符号之间的映射关系。该映射关系可以通过表格和\或公式的形式描述，具体形式这里不做限定。复值调制符号还可以称为复数调制符号、复数值调制符号、复数符号、或符号等。
在本申请实施例的非相干传输中，星座图不仅和待调制比特的比特数有关，而且，星座图中的星座点是对应至少一个天线端口和对应多个资源单元的星座点。
继续以u个比特的待调制比特为例，假设，用于传输待调制比特的天线端口的数量为M，在资源映射过程中，用于传输待调制比特的资源单元的数量为N；对应地，该待调制比特对应的星座图中包括2 u个星座点，每个星座点都包含P个元素，P＝M*N， M为正整数(例如1、2、4、8、16等)，N为大于1的正整数(例如2、4、6、8等)，P为大于1的正整数。一个元素可以理解为一个复值调制符号(简称符号)，P个元素即为P个符号。下文，为了便于描述统一，可以将元素统称为符号，两种描述可以互相替换。此外，作为示例而非限定，可以将该P个元素记做一个M行N列(M*N)或N行M列(N*M)的矩阵，或者可以将该P个元素记做一个元素组，当然，本文也不排除其他的描述方法，例如，该P个元素可以是一个长度为P的序列等。这样，发送端设备可以根据该待调制比特的比特值从该星座图中的多个星座点中确定该待调制比特对应的星座点，从而实现针对该待调制比特的调制过程，得到P个符号。
应理解，本申请实施例中的一个星座点可以对应一个调制符号组，一个调制符号组中包括P个复数调制符号，P个复数调制符号中的任意一个复数调制符号可以是实部为0和/或虚部为0的复数。
基于此，本申请实施例中的星座图还可以认为是一种从比特值到调制符号组的调制映射。即，对于给定的星座图，可以认为该星座图是输入的比特值和输出的调制符号组之间的映射关系。该映射关系可以通过表格和\或公式的形式描述，具体形式这里不做限定。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的调制符号组也可以有其他名称，例如调制符号序列或调制符号矩阵或调制符号等。
为了便于描述，本申请实施例以一个星座点对应一个调制符号组为例进行说明，或者以一个星座点对应一个调制符号序列为例进行说明，或者以一个星座点对应一个调制符号矩阵为例进行说明。
图2所示为本申请实施例的一个星座点的示意图。如图2所示，假设，M＝2，N＝4，该星座点对应的矩阵记为X，矩阵X可以是M*N的矩阵(当然，矩阵X也可以是N*M的矩阵，这里以M*N矩阵为例)，该矩阵包括8个符号，针对上述M*N矩阵，可以这么理解，矩阵X中的第m行第n列的符号映射在第n个资源单元上，通过第m个天线端口被发送。其中，m取遍0至1(即m是取值范围为0至1的整数)，n取遍0至3(即n是取值范围为0至3的整数)。
4、待传输比特流
待传输比特流中包括一个或多个比特。待传输比特流可以是未经过物理层比特级处理的当前待传输的比特流。其中，物理层比特级处理可以包括以下处理中的一种或多种：分段、级联、信道编码、速率匹配、加扰、和添加循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check，CRC等。例如，待传输比特流可以由发送端的媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层递交至发送端的物理层，或者是物理层控制信道的信息比特。发送端可以对待传输比特流进行信道编码、加扰或调制等处理。该待传输比特流可以理解为当前待传输数据，该数据可以是业务数据或者承载于物理层数据信道上的控制信息，也可以是用于无线通信的各种其它控制信息。作为示例而非限定，该业务数据可以是承载于物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)上的数据、也可以是承载于物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)上的数据等。作为示例而非限定，该其它控制信息可以是承载于物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)上的信息(例如，下行控制信息(downlink control information， DCI)，可以是承载于物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)上的信息(例如，上行控制信息(uplink control information，UCI))等。上行控制信息可以包括但不限于正确应答(acknowledgement，ACK)、否定应答(negative acknowledgment，NACK)、信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)、调度请求信息、波束中断恢复请求信息等。其中，ACK/NACK用于反馈是否正确接收到信息，CSI用于反馈信道的状态相关的信息(例如，信道状态信息、预编码矩阵指示或秩指示等)，调度请求信息用于终端设备向网络设备请求调度资源，波束中断恢复请求信息用于终端设备向网络设备上报波束中断并请求进行波束中断恢复。在下文中，待传输比特流和待传输数据可以替换描述。
本申请实施例使用了非相干传输方式传输数据，发送端设备或接收端设备可以不需要基于参考信号传输数据，基于此，针对非相干传输的调制过程做了相关设计，进一步设计了在物理层中处理数据的其他过程，例如，信道编码、加扰等过程。该参考信号还可以称为导频、解调参考信号等。
下面，结合图3至图15，对本申请实施例的传输数据的方法进行详细说明。本申请实施例的所有方法都可以适用于上行传输和下行传输，也可以适用于宏基站和微基站之间等网络设备之间的通信，还可以适用于终端设备和终端设备之间的设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信。为了便于描述，统一以发送端设备和接收端设备作为本申请实施例的执行主体，该发送端设备生成且发送数据，该接收端设备接收且解调数据。在可能的应用场景中，该发送端设备可以是网络设备，或配置在网络设备中的芯片等可以执行本申请实施例的装置，对应地，该接收端设备为终端设备或配置在终端设备中的芯片等可以执行本申请实施例的装置；或者，该发送端设备也可以是终端设备或配置在终端设备中的芯片等可以执行本申请实施例的装置，对应地，该接收端设备为网络设备或配置在网络设备中的芯片等可以执行本申请实施例的装置。
在本申请实施例中，可以将一个星座点对应的多个资源单元(该多个资源单元可以视为一个资源单元组)称为一个调制资源块，或者说，将发送一个星座点的复值调制符号时使用的多个资源单元称为一个调制资源块，调制过程中，以调制资源块为单位对待调制比特进行调制。例如图2中所示的星座点对应的调制资源块中包括4个资源单元。为了便于描述，下文，可以以任一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特(例如，第一待调制比特)为例，对本申请实施例进行描述。
图3所示为本申请实施例的传输数据的方法200的示意性交互图。
在S210中，发送端设备确定第一待调制比特。
其中，该第一待调制比特表示调制过程的输入比特。
可选地，待传输比特流包括第一待调制比特，或，待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定第一待调制比特。
在一种可能的设计中，该第一待调制比特可以是待传输比特流中的部分比特，也可以是该待传输比特流中的全部比特。
具体而言，一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量可以是有限的，但是，实际传输时，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量可能多于一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，这种情况中，可以将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源 单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块。其中，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源可以是预配置的，也可以是网络设备为终端设备调度的，例如通过DCI发送至终端设备，本申请实施例不做限制。
在一种可能的设计中，可以将该待传输比特流分为多个组，一组比特中包括u个比特，多组比特一一对应于等数量的多个调制资源块，每个调制资源块承载其对应的一组比特。其中，任一组比特可以作为该第一待调制比特，该第一待调制比特为该待传输比特流中的部分比特。
在另一种可能的设计中，可以不需要对待传输比特流分组，可以将该待传输比特流作为该第一待调制比特，该第一待调制比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特。发送端设备可以通过一个调制资源块发送该第一待调制比特。可选地，当有多个调制资源块时，发送端设备可以对该待传输比特流进行重复传输，重复传输的次数为调制资源块的数量，每次传输采用一个调制资源块，任意两次传输采用不同的调制资源块，每次传输中，对该待传输比特流进行调制，将调制后的符号映射到对应的调制资源块上。
若用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，可以不需要对该待传输比特流分组，将该待传输比特流作为一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，这里，该待传输比特流即为该第一待调制比特，该第一待调制比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特。
在一种可能的设计中，第一待调制比特可以是发送端设备对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行处理后得到的比特，其中，该至少部分比特可以是该待传输比特流的部分比特，也可以是该待传输比特流的全部比特。作为示例而非限定，该发送端设备可以对该至少部分比特进行信道编码和/或加扰，对应地，该第一待调制比特是对该至少部分比特进行信道编码和/或加扰后的比特。该发送端设备还可以对该至少部分比特进行其它处理，例如以下处理中的一种或多种：码块分段(segmentation)、添加CRC、速率匹配、和码块级联(concatenation)等，本申请实施例不做限制。
例如，在发送端设备对至少部分比特进行信道编码的情况中，可以有两种方式确定第一待调制比特，两种方式的主要区别在于，一种方式是对待传输比特流进行信道编码后，将基于信道编码得到的比特流分组或不分组，以确定该第一待调制比特；另一种方式是将该待传输比特流中分组或不分组的比特进行信道编码，得到新的比特，以确定该第一待调制比特。当基于前一种方式确定该第一待调制比特时，该设计中的待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特；当基于后一种方式确定该第一待调制比特时，若对该待传输比特流分组，则该设计中的待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的部分比特，若对该待传输比特流不分组，则该设计中的待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特。
再例如，在发送端设备对该至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰的情况中，也可以有两种方式确定第一待调制比特，两种方式的主要区别在于，一种方式是对待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后，将得到的新的比特流分组或不分组，以确定第一待调制比特；另一种方式是将该待传输比特流中分组或不分组的比特进行信道编码和加扰，得到新的比特，以确定该第一待调制比特。当基于前一种方式确定该第一待调制比特时，该设计中的待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特；当 基于后一种方式确定该第一待调制比特时，若对该待传输比特流分组，则该设计中的待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的部分比特，若对该待传输比特流不分组，则该设计中的待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特。
这里，关于确定第一待调制比特的具体描述，可以参考下文在各种情况所描述的实施例中关于该第一待调制比特的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
在S220中，发送端设备从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，该第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数。
在S230中，发送端设备使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，该P个第二符号是该P个第一符号，或，该P个第二符号是基于该P个第一符号确定的符号。
不同于相干传输，该方法中，发送端设备无需向接收端设备发送参考信号。即该方法中无需基于参考信号传输P个第二符号。
如前所述，本申请实施例的非相干传输，星座图不仅和待调制比特的比特数有关，而且，星座图中的星座点是针对至少一个天线端口和多个资源单元的星座点。以第一待调制比特和对应的第一星座图为例：第一待调制比特的比特数为第一比特数u，用于传输第一待调制比特的天线端口的数量为M，在资源映射过程中，承载该第一待调制比特的资源单元的数量为N，或者说，N个资源单元是一个调制资源块中包括的资源单元；对应地，该第一星座图中包括2 u个星座点，每个星座点都对应P个符号，P＝M*N。
此外，每个星座点对应一个待调制比特的取值(简称比特值)，这样，发送端设备可以根据第一待调制比特的比特值(记为第一比特值)从第一星座图中的多个星座点中确定第一比特值对应的第一星座点，从而，实现针对该第一待调制比特的调制过程，得到该第一星座点对应的P个符号，该P个符号可以被称为P个第一符号，这里，可以将调制过程看成比特值到调制符号组的调制映射。当根据待传输比特流可以确定多个第一待调制比特时，可以对该多个第一待调制比特分别使用上述调制方法，从而实现对待传输比特流的调制。
在一种可能的设计中，发送端设备可以将P个第一符号映射至M个天线端口的N个资源单元上，使用M个天线端口发送，其中，每个天线端口的N个资源单元上映射该P个第一符号中的N个第一个符号；或者，在另一种可能的设计中，发送端设备对P个第一符号做进一步处理(例如，对该P个第一符号做加扰处理)得到P个第二符号，将该P个第二符号映射至M个天线端口的N个资源单元上，使用M个天线端口发送，其中，每个天线端口的N个资源单元上映射该P个第二符号中的N个第二个符号。
可选地，在星座图的设计中，为了保证数据传输中的低峰均比(peak to average power ratio，PAPR)，在一种可能的设计中，该P个第一符号中每个第一符号的幅值相同，和/或，该P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的整数倍，S＝2*pi/k，k为大于1的整数，pi为圆周率，其还可以被表示为π。例如，k为4。
其中，两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的整数倍，可以理解为两个第一符号之间 的相位差为S的0倍、1倍、2倍、…、或k倍。两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的0倍可以理解为两个第一符号之间的相位差为0，两个第一符号之间的相位差为0还可以理解为两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的k倍。当两个第一符号之间的相位差值大于或等于2*pi，或，当相位差小于0时，该两个第一符号之间的相位差为该相位差值对2*pi取模的结果。
在一种可能的设计中，该P个第一符号中的每个第一符号为正交相移键控(quadrature phase shift keyin，QPSK)符号或二进制相移键控(binary phase shift keying，BPSK)符号。示例性地，当该P个第一符号中的每个第一符号为QPSK符号时，即该P个第一符号中任一符号的取值可以是复数e jπ/4、e j3π/4、e j5π/4或e j7π/4，该P个第一符号中不同符号的取值可以相同，也可以不同，本申请实施例不做限制。当该P个第一符号中的每个第一符号为BPSK符号时，即该P个第一符号中任一符号的取值可以是复数e j2π、或e jπ，该P个第一符号中不同符号的取值可以相同，也可以不同，本申请实施例不做限制。其中，j表示虚数单位，j的平方等于-1。
其中，该P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位差是S的整数倍，对于不同的两个第一符号，该整数倍可以是相同的或不同的数值。该P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位可以相同，也可以不同。假设，P＝4，例如，两个第一符号的相位差可以是S的1倍，另外两个第一符号之间的相位差可以是S的2倍；再例如，两个第一符号的相位差可以是S的1倍，另外两个第一符号之间的相位差为0，对于相位差为0的情况，表示该另外两个第一符号之间的相位相同，这种情况下，可以认为该另外两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的k倍。
具体实现中，例如，P个第一符号中每个第一符号可以从特定的k个候选符号中选择，该k个候选符号之间的最小相位差为S＝2*pi/k，该k个候选符号中每个候选符号可以为QPSK符号，假设，k＝4，4个候选符号可以为[1,-1,j,-j]，也可以为
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000005
P＝8时，8个第一符号中的每个第一符号可以是4候选符号中的任一个符号，8个第一符号中的任意两个第一符号可以是同一个候选符号，也可以是不同的候选符号。例如，若4个候选符号为[1,-1,j,-j]，该8个第一符号可以是[1,1,1,-1,-1,j,j,-j]。其中，j表示虚数单位，j的平方等于-1。
第一星座图的多个星座点中任意两个星座点对应的矩阵可以不同，具体地，该任意两个星座点对应的矩阵中的元素不完全不同，也就是说，该任意两个矩阵中的元素可以完全不同，也可以部分相同，但是，该任意两个矩阵中至少有一个元素是不同的。可选地，第一星座图中一个星座点对应的矩阵和该第一星座图中其他各星座点对应的矩阵都不是线性关系。
在S240中，接收端设备从第一星座图中确定第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
发送端设备通过信道将P个第一符号或P个第二符号发送至接收端设备时，所发送的符号在信道中由于衰落、噪声、或多普勒频移等各种原因可能会有幅度和/或相位上的变形，为了简化描述，在接收端设备将该变形的符号也记载为P个第一符号或P个第二符号。
当发送端设备发送的是P个第一符号时，即，发送端设备发送的P个第二符号是P个第一符号，接收端设备解调该P个第一符号，获得该第一待调制比特；当发送端设备对P个第一符号做了进一步处理，发送的是处理后的P个第二符号时，接收端设 备可以基于该P个第二符号获得该P个第一符号，并解调该P个第一符号，获得该第一待调制比特。当然，若该第一待调制比特是发送端设备对待传输比特流中的比特进行信道编码和/或加扰处理后的比特，接收端设备可以进一步对该第一待调制比特进行解码和/或解扰，获得未进行信道编码和/或加扰的比特，具体描述可以参考下文中各个实施例的相关描述。其中，在接收端设备侧，第一待调制比特为接收端设备的解调输出比特，为了便于对应理解发送端设备和接收端设备的交互流程，在接收端设备将其称为第一待调制比特。
作为示例而非限定，以广义似然比测试(generalized likelihood ratio test，GLRT)接收机为例，对接收端设备解调数据的方式简单说明。应理解，接收端设备也可以通过其他方式解调数据，此处不做限定。
为了便于描述，将第一星座图中第i个星座点对应的矩阵记为X i，i的取值范围为[1，2 u]，2 u为第一星座图中包括的星座点的数量，u为每个星座点对应的资源单元承载的待调制比特的比特数，接收端设备可以根据如下公式计算P个第一符号对应的矩阵和第i个星座点对应的矩阵之间的距离d i。
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000006
其中，针对P个第一符号，接收端设备所接收到的信号表示为Y＝H*X+W，矩阵H是S*M维的矩阵，表示用于传输P个第一符号的信道的信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)，矩阵W为S*N维的矩阵表示该信道中噪声，X表示P个第一符号，X是M*N的矩阵，M为用于传输第一待调制比特的天线端口的数量，N是用于传输第一待调制比特的的资源单元的数量，trace表示矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000007
的迹，Y H表示矩阵Y的共轭转置，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000008
表示X i的共轭转置，S为正整数。
基于上述公式，通过对i取遍1至2 u，计算P个第一符号对应的矩阵和2 u个星座点中每个星座点对应的矩阵之间的距离，可以得到2 u个d i，将最小距离d i对应的的矩阵X i中的P个符号认为是接收端设备检测到的P个第一符号，这样，接收端设备根据检测到的P个第一符号对应的星座点与比特值的对应关系，可以确定矩阵X i对应的比特值即为对该P个第一符号解调后的数据。
例如，第一待调制比特的比特数u＝2，M＝1，N＝4，S＝1，W＝[w1,w2,w3,w4]，为1*4的矢量，H为标量，第一星座图包括4个星座点，4个星座点对应的矩阵分别为：
X 1＝[1,1,1,1]，对应比特值00，
X 2＝[1,1,-1,-1]，对应比特值01，
X 3＝[1,-1,1,-1]，对应比特值10，
X 4＝[1,-1,-1,1]，对应比特值11。
假设,发送端设备发送的第一待调制比特为01，i＝2，对应于发送矩阵X 2，经过信道H后，接收端设备接收到的符号为Y＝[H+w 1,H+w 2,-H+w 3,-H+w 4]。发送端设备接收到Y后，对i取遍1至4(即从1开始，分别对i取1至4，即i分别等于1、2、3、4)，通过
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000009
将上述4个矩阵分别带入该公式中，得到4个X i对应的4个d i值。例如，d 1＝0.6(对应于矩阵X 1),d 2＝0.1(对应于矩阵X 2),d 3＝0.5(对应于矩阵X 3),d 4＝0.9(对应于矩阵X 4)，其中，d 2最小，因此，接收端设备可以确定接收到的P个第一符号为矩阵X 2中的符号，因此，根据矩阵X 2和比特值之间的映射关系得到比特值01，从而解调出该 第一待调制比特。
d i在一定程度上可以表征两个矩阵的行向量生成的子空间之间的差距大小，这两个矩阵表示接收端设备接收到的P个第一符号对应的矩阵(例如，矩阵Y)和第一星座图中第i个星座点对应的矩阵(例如，X i)，d i的值越大，则表示子空间差距越大，d i的值越小则子空间越接近，d i＝0则可以表示两个子空间相同，因此，将距离最小的d i对应的矩阵中的符号作为接收到的符号。
根据上述描述的接收方法，不同于相干传输方法，在本申请实施例提供的方法中，发送端设备无需向接收端设备发送参考信号，接收端设备无需基于参考信号接收P个第二符号。该参考信号可以称为该P个第二符号的参考信号、导频或解调参考信号。当该P个第二符号是承载在物理信道上进行传输时，该参考信号还可以称为该物理信道的参考信号、导频或解调参考信号。
从上述描述可以看出，在非相干传输中，星座图的设计至关重要，下面，对非相干传输与星座图之间的关系进行说明。
在传统的相干传输中，一个星座点对应一个符号，通过一个符号承载待调制比特，而在非相干传输中，是通过矩阵X自身的方向承载待调制比特，或者，当矩阵X表示为M*N的矩阵时，可以理解为是通过矩阵X的行向量生成的空间承载待调制比特。也就是说，一个星座图中不同星座点对应的矩阵的行向量生成的空间是不同的，因此不同的待调制比特对应的空间也不同。假设星座图中的星座点矩阵都是归一化的，即，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000010
其中，矩阵X i表示第一星座图中第i个星座点对应的调制符号矩阵。以上述第一星座图中的任意两个星座点为例，该两个星座点对应的矩阵分别为X 1和X 2，则不存在M*M维的方阵I,使X 1＝I*X 2。原因在于：对X 2左乘矩阵I可以理解为对X 2进行线性变换，当存在这样的I时，X 2可以通过线性变换变成X 1，则X 1和X 2的行向量生成的空间是相同的，因此在非相干传输中，不存在这样的I。
正是这种星座图的设计，满足了非相干传输中发送端设备不需要发送参考信号，以及接收端设备不需要基于参考信号解调数据的特性。具体而言，假设N个资源单元对应的信道近似相同，当星座点对应的矩阵X中的P个符号在信道上传输时，对于接收端设备来说，接收到的符号可以记作Y＝H*X+W，其中，H是S*M维的矩阵，表示该信道的信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)，W为S*N维的矩阵，表示噪声，S为正整数。可以看出，H乘以X是对X进行线性变换，由于对矩阵进行线性变换是不改变行向量生成的空间，所以H*X的行向量生成的空间与X的行向量生成的空间可以看做是相同的，即，可以理解为H*X表示的信道状态和X表示的信道状态是相同的，因此，接收端设备不需要知道信道状态信息(即，H)就可以得到X的行向量生成的空间，从而可以根据X获得待调制比特。
因此，根据本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法，发送端设备将第一待调制比特调制在星座图中的第一星座点上，其中，该第一星座点对应一个M*N的矩阵X，该矩阵X中包括P个第一符号，其中，P＝M*N，将该P个第一符号或基于该P个第一符号得到的P个第二符号映射至N个资源单元上，通过M个天线端口发送给接收端设备。对于接收端设备来说，将接收到的符号记作Y＝H*X+W，其中，H表示信道状态信息，H乘以X是对X进行线性变换，由于对矩阵进行线性变换是不改变行向量生成的空间，所以H*X的行向量生成的空间与X的行向量生成的空间是相同的。在该方法中，由 于第一星座点是一个M*N的矩阵X，是通过该矩阵X自身的方向承载该第一待调制比特，或者说，是通过该矩阵X的行向量生成的空间承载该第一待调制比特，这样，可以使得接收端设备不需要知道信道状态信息(即，H)就可以得到矩阵X的行向量生成的空间，从而可以根据该矩阵X解调出该第一待调制比特。因此，在该方法中，可以不需要通过传输参考信号来传输数据(例如，第一待调制比特)。这样，一方面，相比于相干传输中仅在调度的部分资源单元(用于承载数据的资源单元，或者是调度的资源单元中除去传输参考信号的资源单元)上进行数据传输的方式，该方法可以对调度的资源单元联合设计，优化维度更高。例如，优化时，可以考虑提高衰落信道下的吞吐量性能，对抗信道衰落。另一方面，由于不需要传输参考信号，可以节省资源开销，提高了资源利用率，因此有效地提高了数据传输的吞吐量性能，提高了数据的传输性能。
在S220和S240中，无论接收端设备还是发送端设备都需要确知第一星座图，下面，对发送端设备和接收端设备确定该第一星座图的方式进行说明。
方式1
方式1-1根据M和N中的至少一个确定第一星座图。
该方式可以适用于进行上行传输和下行传输的发送端设备和接收端设备。
可选地，根据M和N中的至少一个，确定第一星座图，其中，该第一星座图中每个星座点对应P个符号。M和N中的至少一个可以是M、N、或者M和N。
具体实现中，若通信协议或系统支持的天线端口的数量为固定值，例如，M＝1，不需要确定M，可以根据N确定对应的第一星座图。若通信协议或系统支持星座图对应的资源单元的数量为固定值，同样，不需要确定N，可以根据M确定对应的第一星座图。若通信协议或系统可以支持可变数量的天线端口和资源单元，可以根据M和N确定对应的第一星座图。
其中，M可以是网络设备配置的，对于作为发送端设备或接收端设备的终端设备，该网络设备可以通过信令向该终端设备指示M，使得该终端设备确定M。其中，此处的发送端设备或接收端设备是从待调制比特的角度而言的，若从M的角度而言，网络设备为发送端设备，终端设备为接收端设备。N的确定方式可以参考下文针对确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元的方式的相关描述。
示例性地，根据M和N中的至少一个确定第一星座图时，可以有多个候选星座图，其中任一个候选星座图有其对应的M i和N i。其中，M i是该多个候选星座图中第i个星座图对应的M，N i是该多个候选星座图中第i个星座图对应的N，i为大于1且小于候选星座图的个数的整数。例如该多个候选星座图中第i个星座图中的星座点是M i*N i维的矩阵。终端设备确定M和N后，即给定M和N，可以从该多个候选星座图中选择M和N对应的星座图，第一星座图是根据所选择的星座图确定的，所选择的星座图对应的M i和N i分别等于所给定的M和N。
可选地，根据所选择的星座图确定第一星座图时，所选择的星座图中包括2 u个星座点，则所选择的星座图可以作为第一星座图。
可选地，根据所选择的星座图确定第一星座图时，所选择的星座图中包括多于2 u个星座点，可以进一步根据方式1-2，将所选择的星座图看做下述方式1-2中的总星座图，并根据方式1-2所描述的方法确定第一星座图。该方法可以描述为根据M和N中至少一个、以及 根据u确定第一星座图。
再示例性地，当系统中支持的星座图中的星座点都是M*N维的矩阵时，可以认为不需要根据M和N中的至少一个确定第一星座图，可以仅需根据系统中支持的星座图确定第一星座图。
可选地，系统中所支持的星座图为多个候选星座图，其中第i个候选星座图中包括2 ui个星座点，i为大于1且小于候选星座图的个数的整数。可以从该多个候选星座图中选择u对应的星座图，第一星座图为所选择的星座图，所选择的星座图中包括2 u个星座点。该多个候选星座图可以是多个独立的星座图，也可以是下述方式1-2中描述的多个子星座图，本申请实施例不做限制。
可选地，系统中所支持的星座图为下述方式1-2中的总星座图，则可以根据方式1-2所描述的方法确定第一星座图。
方式1-2根据u确定第一星座图。
在本申请实施例中，第一星座图可以是一个独立的星座图，也可以是一个总星座图的子星座图，也可以是包括多个子星座图的总星座图。若第一星座图与总星座图有关，为了便于描述确定该第一星座图的过程，首先，对涉及的总星座图做一描述，随后，对第一星座图与总星座图的关系进行说明。
在星座图的设计中，可以设计一个总星座图，该总星座图中可以包括多种比特数对应的子星座图。参考图4，例如，总星座图包括C 2个星座点，子星座图包括C 1个星座点，C 2>C 1。其中，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000011
p 2＞p 1，其中，p 1为整数，p 2为正整数。总星座图可以用于确定多种比特数对应的子星座图，p 2可以理解为该多种比特数中的最大比特数，每种比特数对应的子星座图中包括总星座图中的部分或全部星座点，该部分或全部星座点形成一个子星座图。例如，假设，p 2＝2,总星座图中包括4个星座点，星座点分别为(1,1)、(1，j)、(1，-1)、(1,-j)，若p 1＝1，对应的子星座图中包括2个星座点，子星座图中的星座点可以是上述4星座点中的任意两个或者预定义的两个，例如，该子星座图中的星座点是(1,1)和(1，j)。其中，j为虚数单位，j的平方等于-1。可以看出，该总星座图可以可以用于确定两种比特数(1和2)对应的子星座图，2是该两种比特数中的最大比特数。
此外，总星座图中的多个星座点对应的天线端口的数量和资源单元的数量可以是相同的，或者总星座图中多个子星座图对应的天线端口的数量和资源单元的数量可以是相同的。继续以上述p 2＝2，p 1＝1为例，4个星座点都对应M 1个天线端口和N 1个资源单元，M 1为正整数，N 1为大于1的整数，p 1＝1对应的2个星座点形成的子星座图也对应M 1个天线端口和N 1个资源单元。
这样，发送端设备和接收端设备可以仅需要保存一个总星座图，就可以获得不同大小的子星座图，可以降低存储空间。
基于此，本申请实施例可以根据u确定第一星座图。
在第一种可能的设计中，该第一星座图中的星座点属于第三星座图，该第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，该第三星座图包括L 2个星座点，L 2≥L 1，其中，L 1和L 2为大于0的整数。其中，L 2＝2 v，v大于或等于u，v为大于或等于1的整数。
其中，第三星座图可以为上述的总星座图，第一星座图可以为上述的一个子星座图或总星座图，L 2类比于C 2，p 2类比于v，L 1类比于C 1或C 2，p 1类比于u。
因此，发送端设备或接收端设备可以根据u，从第三星座图中确定第一星座图。
在第二种可能的设计中，基于总星座图的设计，可以通过以下方式获得u，基于获得的u确定对应的第一星座图。这里，该第一星座图可以为上述的总星座图，p 2类比于u，p 1类比于v。
例如，发送端设备可以将待传输比特流中的至少部分比特比特作为第一待调制比特，或者，可以对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特做处理(例如，信道编码和/或加扰)后得到第一待调制比特。为了便于和后面的待调制比特区分，将这里的第一待调制比特记为旧的第一待调制比特。发送端设备在获得旧的第一待调制比特后，可以为旧的第一待调制比特补充u-v位比特后，得到新的第一待调制比特。其中，旧的第一待调制比特比特数为v，新的第一待调制比特的比特数为u，u大于或等于v。其中，u-v比特的比特值可以是预配置的。例如，可以在旧的第一待调制比特之前补充u-v位0比特或1比特，或者，在旧的第一待调制比特之后补充u-v位0比特或1比特，也可以按照预定义的其它规则为旧的第一待调制比特补充u-v位。其中，u-v位0比特可以描述为：u-v个值为0的比特，u-v位1比特可以描述为：u-v个值为1的比特。
这里，旧的第一待调制比特和新的第一待调制比特都可以视为本申请实施例的第一待调制比特，当采用方式1-2的第二种可能的设计确定星座图时，是对新的第一待调制比特进行调制，其中，旧的第一待调制比特的比特数v的确定方式可以参考下文各个实施例中在描述关于确定该第一待调制比特的过程中关于u的确定方式的描述，只需要将下文中的u替换为v即可。当不采用方式1-2的第二种可能的设计确定星座图时，是对旧的第一待调制比特进行调制。
关于第二种可能的设计，对于接收端设备来说，按照预定义的规则，可以确知总星座图即为第一星座图，也确知该总星座图对应的多种比特数中的最大比特数即为u，可以基于确定的v，按照预定义的规则，从新的第一待调制比特中去除u-v位0比特或1比特，从而得到旧的第一待调制比特。
例如，u＝4，v＝2，u-v＝2，旧的第一待调制比特为00，发送端设备在旧的第一待调制比特之前补充2位1比特，获得的新的第一待调制比特为1100。接收端设备在解调得到新的第一待调制比特“1100”后，按照预定义的规则，去掉1100的前2位1比特，获得旧的第一待调制比特“00”。
方式2通过信令指示第一星座图
该方式可以适用于进行上行传输或下行传输中的终端设备，其中，网络设备确定第一星座图的方式可以参考方式1或方式2或其它方法，终端设备可以通过如下方式确定该第一星座图。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一星座图。
作为示例而非限定，第一指示信息可以是对应该第一星座图对应的矩阵值。
作为示例而非限定，第一指示信息可以是对应该第一星座图的索引，终端设备和网络设备都已知至少一个星座图以及每个星座图对应的索引。其中，该至少一个星座图中不同星座图对应的天线端口的数量可以相同也可以不同。这样，终端设备可以根据第一星座图对应的索引，从该至少一个星座图中确定该第一星座图。其中，该至少一个可以是1个、2个、 3个或更多个，本申请实施例不做限制。该至少一个星座图还可以称为候选星座图、候选星座图集合、或者其它名称，本申请实施例不做限制。
表1表示的是至少一个星座图和索引之间的对应关系。假设，该至少一个星座图包括4个星座图，该4个星座图的索引分别是0-3。第一指示信息中可以包括2比特，该2比特用于指示第一星座图的索引，该2比特的值可以为00、01、10或11。示例性地，若第一星座图为星座图A，则第一指示信息中的2比特的值可以为00，即采用索引0指示星座图A。该4个星座图可以对应相同数量的天线端口，例如，4个星座图都对应2个天线端口，4个星座图也可以对应多个数量的天线端口，例如，星座图A和星座图B都对应2个天线端口，星座图C和星座图D都对应4个天线端口。
应理解，表1所示的星座图与索引之间的关系仅为示意性说明，也可以有其他形式的对应关系，本申请实施例不做限定。
表1
索引 星座图
0(第一指示信息的2比特的值：00) 星座图A
1(第一指示信息的2比特的值：01) 星座图B
2(第一指示信息的2比特的值：10) 星座图C
3(第一指示信息的2比特的值：11) 星座图D
作为示例而非限定，第一指示信息可以是将指示第一星座图的索引的信息和其他信息进行联合编码后得到的指示信息，即第一指示信息用于指示第一星座图的索引和该其他信息。例如，该其他信息可以是调制编码机制(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)的指示信息，该MCS可以指示以下内容中的一种或多种：调制方式、信道编码的码率和频谱效率。这样，该第一指示信息可以是将MCS和第一星座图的索引联合编码后得到的指示信息，或者该第一指示信息可以是将信道编码的码率和频谱效率中的至少一个与第一星座图的索引联合编码后得到的指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息和第三指示信息，其中，该第二指示信息用于指示天线端口的数量M，该第三指示信息用于指示对应M的第一星座图。作为示例而非限定，第三指示信息可以用于指示该第一星座图的索引，不过，由于M与星座图之间存在对应关系，M可以对应至少一个星座图，因此，该第一星座图的索引是在M对应的至少一个星座图的范围内的索引，对于每个M，终端设备和网络设备都已知每个M对应的至少一个星座图以及每个星座图对应的索引。这样，终端设备可以根据索引确定第一星座图。其中，一个M可以理解为天线端口的一种数量。
表2a和表2b表示的都是至少一个星座图和索引之间的对应关系，不同之处在于，表2a和表2b中的星座图对应的天线端口的数量不同。假设，表2a中的星座图对应2个天线端口，表2b中的星座图对应4个天线端口。表2a中2个天线端口对应的星座图采用索引0和1表示，可以通过1个比特信息从表2a中指示所配置的第一星座图。表2b中4个天线端口对应的星座图采用索引0和1表示，可以通过1个比特信息从表2b中指示所配置的第一星座图。若第一星座图为星座图A，则第二指示信息可以指示M＝2，第三指示信息的值为0，即采用索引0指示星座图A。可以看出，相比于表1所表示的星座图与索引的关系，表2a和表2b所表示的 星座图与索引的关系，可以有效地减少索引占用的比特数，进而节省信令开销。
应理解，表2a和和表2b所示的至少一个星座图与索引之间的关系仅为示意性说明，也可以有其他形式的对应关系，本申请实施例不做限定。
表2a(M＝2)
索引 星座图
0 星座图A
1 星座图B
表2b(M＝4)
索引 星座图
0 星座图C
1 星座图D
可选地，网络设备可以通过将第二指示信息和第三指示信息进行联合编码的形式发送给该终端设备，或者描述为网络设备可以通过一个第四指示信息向终端设备同时指示天线端口的数量M和M对应的第一星座图。示例性地，如表3所示为第四指示信息的可能的取值，以及其所指示的天线端口的数量M和M对应的第一星座图。
表3
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000012
需要说明的是，当M对应1个星座图时，可以不需要第三指示信息。
在这种指示方式中，当M可以对应多个星座图时，在M对应的多个星座图的范围内指示该第一星座图，可以有效地节省信令开销。例如，M对应4个星座图，可以仅采用2比特指示第一星座图。
以上，对发送端设备或接收端设备确定第一星座图的方式做了详细说明，下面，基于实际考虑，对发送端设备或接收端设备确定用于承载该第一待调制比特的N个资源单元的方式做详细说明。
如前所述，在实际传输中，可能需要将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块。对待传输比特流处理过程中，可以分别针对每个调制资源块对应的待调制比特进行调制。
基于上述考虑，作为示例而非限定，针对待传输比特流，本申请实施例提供了两种方式(即，方式A和方式B)，用于发送端设备或接收端设备确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元。应理解，下文中确定的一个调制资源块包括的资源单元可以是承载第一待调制比特的N个资源单元。其中，一个调制资源块占用的资源单元还可以描述为一个调制资源块中包括的资源单元。
方式A
一个调制资源块占用的资源单元是基于用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源确定的。
其中，该时频资源可以指示资源单元的数量和时频域位置。
如前所述，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源可以是预配置的，也可以是网络设备为终端设备调度的，例如通过DCI、系统消息、RRC信令、多媒体介入控制单元(medium access control control element，MAC CE)或广播消息等形式发送至终端设备，本申请实施例不做限制。当待传输比特流为数据信道上承载的数据时，该时频资源可以是为PUSCH或PDSCH配置的时频资源，当待传输比特流为控制信息时，该时频资源可以是PDCCH或PUCCH上的时频资源。
在该方式中，针对待传输比特流，系统或通信协议可以规定或默认仅使用一个调制资源块承载待传输比特流或承载基于待传输比特流得到的比特流，不需要对待传输比特流或基于待传输比特流得到的比特流分组。此时，可以将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元作为一个调制资源块占用的资源单元。这种情况中，可以将待传输比特流作为第一待调制比特，或，第一待调制比特为发送端设备对待传输比特流进行处理(例如，信道编码和/或加扰)后得到的比特流。
在该方式中，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量。换句话说，终端设备不认为会存在用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量与一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量不相等的配置。
在本申请实施例中，作为发送端设备或接收端设备的终端设备，网络设备可以通过信令(例如RRC信令、DCI信令)向终端设备指示用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源。网络设备通过信令向终端设备指示用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源的方法可以参考LTE标准36.212中通过DCI为PDSCH或PUSCH进行RB分配的方法，或参考NR标准38.212中通过DCI为PDSCH或PUSCH进行RB分配的方法，或可以参考其他资源分配方法，本申请实施例中不做限制。
方式B
一个调制资源块占用的资源单元是基于用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定的。
其中，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源的属性包括该时频资源中包括的资源单元的数量和该时频资源的时频域位置。该第一阈值是用于和该时频资源做比较的参数，其可以是网络设备配置的，也可以是预定义的。第一阈值用于确定一个调制资源块中包括的资源单元的数量。
可选地，第一阈值可以是资源单元的数量，为了便于区分，采用T表示，T为正整数，例如1、2、4、8等；或者，第一阈值也可以是时域单元的数量(为了便于区分，将时域单元的数量记为a)和频域单元的数量(为了便于区分，将频域单元的数量记为b)，a与b的乘积可以确定一个调制资源块中包括的资源单元的数量，即，T＝a*b。作为示例而非限定，以频域单元为子载波、时域单元为时域符号为例，对a和b的一些可能的取值做举例说明。例如，a＝12，或，a为12的倍数；a还可以取1、2、3、4或6，均为12的约数，有利于调度。又例如，b＝1、2、4、7或14等。其中，1为单 符号，在一个调制资源块中信道在时域变化最小；2和4分别为双符号和4符号，在一个调制资源块中信道在时域变化也较小；7和14分别为半时隙(微时隙的一种)和时隙，方便调度，在一个调制资源块中信道在时域变化不大的情况可以使用。
可选地，第一阈值可以与子载波间隔有关。以子载波间隔为15*2^g kHz的情况为例，对第一阈值与子载波间隔的关系进行说明。其中g为大于或等于0的整数，例如0、1、2、3、或4。
在一种可能的设计中，假设，第一阈值为T，T与2^g成反比，也就是说子载波间隔每增加一倍，T减小一半(若T不能被2整除，则为除2取整)。
在另一种可能的设计中，假设，第一阈值是时域单元的数量a和频域单元的数量b，T个资源单元由a个时域单元和b个频域单元组成，即T＝a*b，b可以与子载波间隔有关。例如，b与2^g成反比，也就是说子载波间隔增加一倍该时频资源占用的频域单元数量b减小一倍。
以上两种设计可以保证该时频资源所占用的频域资源的带宽不变，这样保证该时频资源上信道在频域上的变化不大。
在另一种可能的设计中，a可以与子载波间隔有关，例如，a与2^g成正比，也就是说子载波间隔增大一倍，a增大一倍。在这种设计中，由于子载波间隔增大一倍，对应的资源单元的时域长度近似减少一倍，因此a增大一倍可以保证一个调制资源块占用的时域长度不变，也就可以保证该调制资源块对应的时频资源上信道在时域上变化不大。
此外，还可以通过为每个子载波间隔配置对应的T，或，配置对应的a和/或b，实现不同子载波间隔下一个调制资源块具有独立的T，或，具有独立的a和/或b，从而可以通过配置的方式保证在一个调制资源块中的信道变化不大。
可选地，在通信协议中，定义了带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)的概念。例如，网络设备在一个小区中为终端设备配置一个或多个BWP，并可以激活其中的一个或多个BWP进行数据传输。一个BWP对应一个子载波间隔配置以及系统带宽中的一段带宽或一段频域资源，因此，可以通过为一个BWP配置第一阈值，即，配置对应的T，或，配置对应的a和/或b。例如，为不同BWP配置的第一阈值可以相同，也可以不同。在方式B中，可以将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中的资源单元数与第一阈值T中的最小值，作为一个调制资源块中的资源单元的数量。
当用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量小于T时，不需要将该时频资源分组，可以将该时频资源中所包括的资源单元作为一个调制资源块占用的资源单元，一个调制资源块承载待传输比特流或承载基于待传输比特流得到的比特流。
当用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量大于T时，可以将该时频资源分组，得到多个资源单元组，即，得到多个调制资源块，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量可以都为T。在该时频资源所包括的资源单元不能整除T的情况下，可以使得其中一个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量大于或小于T。
一个调制资源块(例如，第一调制资源块)承载的待调制比特(例如，第一待调制比特)可以是待传输比特流中的部分比特，也可以是基于待传输比特流的至少部分 比特得到的比特。对应地，一个调制资源块占用的资源单元即为用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元中的部分资源单元。
例如，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中包括10个RE，T＝5，则可以将该10个RE分为两组，得到两个调制资源块，每个调制资源块中包括其中5个RE。
再例如，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中包括11个RE，T＝5，则可以将该11个RE分为两组，得到两个调制资源块，其中一个调制资源块中包括5个RE，另一个调制资源块中包括6个RE；或者，可以将该11个RE分为3组，得到3个调制资源块，其中两个调制资源块中各包括5个RE，另一个调制资源块中包括1个RE。
作为示例而非限定，图5所示为本申请实施例的调制资源块的示意图。如图5所示，每个小方格表示一个资源单元，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中包括12个资源单元，T＝6。则，每6个资源单元组成一个调制资源块，得到两个调制资源块，分别是调制资源块1和调制资源块2。
在对用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元分组的情况中，可以采用先时域后频域的方式确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元，或者，采用先频域后时域的方式确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元。下面，以资源单元为RE的时频资源为例，对这两种方式分别做说明。
按照先时域后频域的方式确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元
例如，资源单元为RE，假设，一个RE的标号为(m,n)。其中，m可以表示RE的子载波索引，可以沿着频率增加的方向从0开始，作为示例而非限定，0对应系统的频域资源中频域位置最低的子载波。n可以表示RE的时域符号的索引，可以沿着时间顺序从0开始，作为示例而非限定，0对应时隙中第一个符号。对于一个RE，可以定义序号k＝m*T 0+n，其中，T 0为用于传输待传输比特流的时域资源中的时域符号数，按照序号k递增的方式，每T个RE为一组，得到每个调制资源块。在该方式中，由于时域信道变换慢，因此，可以提高解调性能。
作为示例而非限定，图6所示为本申请实施例的调制资源块的另一示意图。参考图6左边的图，m的取值范围为0-5，n的取值范围为0-1，T 0＝2。基于上述定义序号k的公式，图6左边的图中的RE的序号k如图所示，其中，序号0-5的RE组成一个调制资源块，序号6-11的RE组成另一个调制资源块。
按照先频域后时域的方式确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元
例如，资源单元为RE，假设，参考上述方式定义一个RE的标号为(m,n)，区别在于，对于一个RE，定义序号k＝n*F0+m，其中F0为用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中的子载波数。在该方式中，对应于同一个调制资源块的符号优先映射在同一个时域符号上或相邻的时域符号上，可以使得接收端设备在接收完一个调制资源块的符号后，就对承载于这个调制资源块上的符号进行解调，不需要等待在接收完承载于所有调制资源块上的符号后再解调，因此，有助于快速解调。
参考图6右边的图，m的取值范围为0-5，n的取值范围为0-1，T 0＝2。基于上述定义序号k的公式，图6右边的图中的RE的序号k如图所示，其中，序号0-5的RE的时频资源组成一个调制资源块，序号6-11的RE的时频资源组成另一个调制资源块。
应理解，上述两种方式都可以应用于上行传输和下行传输，发送端设备或接收端设备 都可以基于任一种方式确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元。
在上述两种方式中，根据用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元，或，根据用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元，可以使得一个调制资源块占用的资源单元不会太多，在相干时间和相干带宽内，使得一个调制资源块占用的资源单元之间的信道变化不会太大，有助于提高非相干传输中数据的解码性能，从而提高解码正确率。
在本申请实施例中，可以将针对待传输比特流的至少部分比特的处理过程分为4种情况，情况A：调制+资源映射，情况B：调制+加扰+资源映射，情况C：信道编码+调制+加扰+资源映射，情况D：信道编码+调制+资源映射。
下面，基于上述4种情况，以第一待调制比特为例，分情况描述发送端设备对第一待调制比特的处理过程以及接收端设备获取第一待调制比特的过程。应理解，当第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特或基于待传输比特流的部分比特得到的比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，以及，接收端设备获取其他待调制比特的过程与接收获得第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，后续不再赘述。
情况A：调制+资源映射
在这种情况中，如图7所示，对第一待调制比特的处理过程包括确定该第一待调制比特、对该第一待调制比特的调制过程和资源映射过程，下面，基于调制过程中确定星座图的不同方式，将实施例分为两个大实施例，即，实施例1和实施例2，对每个实施例的整个处理过程中的每个步骤做详细说明，其中，实施例1可以基于前文确定第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定第一星座图，实施例2可以基于前文确定第一星座图的方式中的方式2确定第一星座图。此外，在情况A中，P个第二符号即为P个第一符号。
实施例1
在该实施例中，发送端设备可以基于上述确定第一星座图的方式1确定第一星座图。
步骤A1：确定第一待调制比特。
如前所述，若需要将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块，在一种可能的设计中，可以将待传输比特流分为多组比特，所分成的比特组的组数等于调制资源块的个数，该多组比特一一地对应该多个调制资源块，一个调制资源块承载其对应的一组比特，其中，任一组比特可以作为第一待调制比特；在另一种可能的设计中，不需要对待传输比特流分组，可以将该待传输比特流作为第一待调制比特，可以对该待传输比特流进行重复传输，重复传输的次数为调制资源块的数量。例如，每次传输采用一个调制资源块，任意两次传输采用不同的调制资源块，每次传输中，对该待传输比特流进行调制，将调制后的符号映射到对应的调制资源块上。
若用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，也可以不需要对该待传输比特流分组，将该待传输比特流作为一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特。这里，该待传输比特流即为该第一待调制比特。
针对将该待传输比特流分组的情况，下面,作为示例而非限定，对确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的过程进行详细说明。其中，该第一待调制比特可以是下文中任一个调制资源块承载的比特。
为了便于描述，将待传输比特流的比特数记为u t，将调制资源块的数量记为t，将每个调制资源块对应的比特数记为u 0、将每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量记为N 0，将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中的资源单元的数量记为N t，第一待调制比特为任一个调制资源块对应的比特，将该第一待调制比特对应的的第一比特数记为u，u＝u 0,将第一调制资源块中包括的资源单元的数量记为N，N＝N 0，所有参量的符号可以全文通用。
第一步：确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数
在该步骤中，可以有如下三种方式确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数，其中，在第一种方式中，发送端设备可以是终端设备或网络设备，在第二种方式和第三种方式中，发送端设备可以是终端设备。下面，对这三种方式分别进行说明。
第一种方式
在一种可能的设计中，发送端设备根据待传输比特流的比特数和用于承载该待传输比特流的调制资源块的数量，确定该每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
例如，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000013
当u t无法被t整除时，可以使其中一个调制资源块对应的比特数大于或小于其他调制资源块对应的比特数。例如，u t＝10，t＝3，可以使得其中两个调制资源块对应的比特数为3，其余一个调制资源块对应的比特数为4。再例如，u t＝13，t＝4，可以使得其中3个调制资源块对应的比特数为3，其余一个调制资源块对应的比特数为1。
在本申请实施例中，关于如何获取待传输比特流的调制资源块的数量，可以有如下方式：
当发送端设备为终端设备时，调制资源块的数量可以是网络设备通过信令指示的。
调制资源块的数量也可以是发送端设备根据每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量和用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元的数量确定的，例如，假设，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元为N 0，用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量为N t，则
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000014
其中，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000015
表示向上取整，当N t一定被N 0整除时，不需要取整符号。
其中，关于发送端设备确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量的方式，可以参考上文中针对发送端设备确定一个调制资源块占用的资源单元的方式，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
发送端设备也可以根据待传输比特流的比特数、每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量和用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元的数量，确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的比特数。例如，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000016
同理，当u 0是非整数时，可以使其中一个调制资源块对应的比特数大于或小于其他调制资源块对应的比特数。若N t/N 0不可以整除u t，例如，u t＝10，N t/N 0＝3，可以使得其中两个调制资源块对应的比特数为3，其余一个调制资源块对应的比特数为4；再例如，u t＝13，N t/N 0＝4，可以使得其中3个调制资源块对应的比特数为3，其余一个调制资源块对应的比特数为1。若N t/N 0不能整除，则可以对其向上取整，按照上述 方式确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
第二种方式
该方式可以适用于发送端设备为终端设备的情况。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备向终端设备发送用于指示每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量的资源指示信息和用于指示用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元的调度信息，该终端设备根据该资源指示信息和该调度信息确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
作为示例而非限定，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量N 0与用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元的数量N t可以共同对应该待传输比特流的比特数u t，该对应关系可以通过例如表格的方式呈现，例如，在表格中，行表示N t，列表示N 0，一个特定的N t和特定的N 0对应一个u t，这样，终端设备可以通过N 0与N t确定u t；根据t＝N t/N 0的比值可以确定调制资源块的数量t；根据u 0＝u t/t的比值可以确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数u 0。
其中，用于指示每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量的资源指示信息可以是独立的信令，也可以是承载于其他信息中的信令。
作为示例而非限定，该资源指示信息可以是调制编码方案(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)配置信息中的信令。示例性地，MCS配置信息可以通过资源指示信息指示每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量N 0。由于在调制过程中，需要将待调制比特通过星座图调制，而本申请实施例的星座图中每个星座点对应多个资源单元，所以，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量可以理解为对待调制比特进行调制的调制方式，通过每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量表示调制方式。例如，参考表4，表4所示为MCS与N 0之间的关系，可以通过MCS的索引表示MCS，从表4可以看出，一个索引指示一个MCS，一个MCS指示一个N 0，或者，可以理解为一个MCS对应一个N 0。可选地，该MCS配置信息还可以用于指示码率，该码率表示编码前的比特与编码后的比特的比值。
由于一个MCS配置信息指示一种MCS，具体实现中，可以通过MCS和N t指示u t。例如，可以采用查表的方式，表中的行表示N t，列表示MCS。参考表5，表5所示为MCS、N t与u t的关系，第一行表示不同的N t，第一列表示不同的MCS的索引，从第二列开始，第二行至第四行表示由不同的MCS与不同的N t指示的u t。假设，N t＝20，索引1指示的MCS是MCS_2，则可以确定：MCS_2中的资源指示信息指示N 0＝10，MCS_2和N t＝10指示u t＝30，调制资源块的数量t＝N t/N 0＝20/10＝2，每个调制资源块对应的比特数u 0＝u t/t＝30/2＝15。
应理解，表5所示的MCS、N t与u t的关系仅为示意性说明，也可以有其他形式的对应关系，本申请实施例不做限定。
还应理解，上述通过资源指示信息指示的N 0和调度信息指示的N t确定u 0的方式仅为示意性说明，例如，终端设备可以通过频谱效率和N 0确定u 0，其中，频率效率可以用于确定一个资源单元上承载的比特数，可以承载于MCS配置信息中，或者，终端设备可以通过频谱效率和N t确定u t，并根据t和u t确定u 0。
表4
MCS的索引 N 0
0(MCS_1) 10
1(MCS_2) 10
2(MCS_3) 20
… …
表5
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000017
可以看出，在这种设计方式中，将用于指示N 0的资源指示信息包括在MCS中，以达到指示N 0目的，并且，通过MCS与N t指示u t。实际上，通过MCS与N t指示的情况下，也可以不需要通过MCS指示N 0，终端设备可以通过其他信息确定N 0或自主确定N 0。
在另一种可能的设计中，终端设备根据每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量、用于传输待传输比特流的MCS和用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量，确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
在该设计方式中，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量+可以是预定义的，作为示例而非限定，系统或通信协议预定义每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量是定值，例如，该定值为6，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量也可以是网络设备通过资源指示信息指示的；用于传输该待传输比特流的MCS可以是网络设备通过MCS配置信息指示的；用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量可以是网络设备通过调度信息指示的。
作为示例而非限定，系统或通信协议可以规定，用于传输该待传输比特流的MCS与用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量N t可以共同对应该待传输比特流的比特数u t，该对应关系可以通过例如表格的方式呈现，例如，参考表6，在表6中，行表示N t，列表示MCS的索引，一个特定的MCS和特定的N t对应一个u t，第一行表示不同的N t，第一列表示不同的MCS的索引，从第二列开始，第二行至第四行表示由不同的MCS与不同的N t指示的不同的u t，例如，索引0指示的MCS_1和N t＝10，可以指示u t＝20，这样，终端设备可以根据MCS与N t确定u t；根据该资源指示信息或预定义方式确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量N 0，进而，根据t＝N t/N 0的比值可以确定调制资源块的数量t；根据u 0＝u t/t的比值可以确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数u 0。
表6
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000019
在上述两种可能的设计中，可选地，网络设备可以根据子载波间隔确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量，进而，通过该资源指示信息指示每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量。目的是为了尽可能保证这些数量的资源单元上的信道变化不会太大。这里的每个调制资源块的数量可以类比于上文中的第一阈值，网络设备根据子载波间隔确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量可以参考上文关于第一阈值与子载波间隔的关系的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
第三种方式
该方式可以适用于发送端设备为终端设备的情况，在该方式中，网络设备向终端设备发送用于指示每个调制资源块对应的比特数的指示信息。终端设备可以根据该指示信息确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
其中，该指示信息可以是独立的信令，也可以是承载于其他信息中的信令。
作为示例而非限定，该指示信息可以是MCS配置信息中的信令，或者，描述为MCS配置信息可以用于指示该指示信息，可选地，该MCS配置信息还可以用于指示码率，可选地，该MCS配置信息还可以用于指示调制方式，调制方式可以理解为每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量。
在一种可能的设计中，该网络设备可以基于上述确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数的第一种方式确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
在一种可能的设计中，该网络设备可以通过每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量和传输该待传输比特流的资源单元确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。
另一种可能的设计中，网络设备也可以根据每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量、用于传输待传输比特流的MCS和用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量，确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。具体描述可以参考上述确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数的第二种方式的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
第二步:根据每个调制资源块对应的比特数，确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特。
作为示例而非限定，发送端设备可以根据t个调制资源块的顺序以及每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的比特数截取相应的比特，从而获得每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特。
例如，对于t个调制资源块中的第i个调制资源块，第i个调制资源块承载的待调制比特为待传输比特流中的第[(i-1)*u+1]个比特到第(i*u)个比特，i取遍0至t-1。假设，待传输比特流为10001100，每个调制资源块对应4个比特，第1个调制资源块承载的待调制比特为1000，第2个调制资源块承载的待调制比特为1100。
其中，t个调制资源块的编号可以是按照先时域后频域的方式确定的，也可以是按照先频域后时域的方式确定的。
图8和图9所示为本申请实施例的调制资源块的示意图。图8和图9中示出了12个调制资源块，图8是按照先频域后时域的方式为调制资源块编号，有助于提高解调性能；图9是按照先时域后频域的方式为调制资源块编号，有助于快速解调。
步骤A2:调制(获得P个第一符号)
在对第一待调制比特进行调制的过程中，发送端设备从第一星座图中确定该第一待调制比 特对应的第一星座点，得到该第一星座点对应的P个第一符号，其中，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数。
下面，分两个步骤描述发送端设备对该第一待调制比特进行调制的过程。
第一步：确定第一星座图
星座图与天线端口的数量、资源单元的数量以及待调制比特的比特数有关，发送端设备可以基于上述方式1确定确定该第一星座图，具体描述参考上文关于方式1的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
第二步：确定第一星座点
星座图中每个星座点对应一个比特值，发送端设备可以基于该第一星座图中每个星座点与每种比特值的对应关系，确定第一待调制比特的比特值(即，第一比特值)对应的第一星座点，获得该第一星座点对应的P个第一符号，完成针对该第一待调制比特的调制过程。
步骤A3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
发送端设备基于得到的P个第一符号，将该P个第一符号映射在M个天线端口各自的N个资源单元上，其中，每个天线端口对应N个资源单元，每个天线端口对应的N个资源单元上映射N个第一符号，每个天线端口的一个资源单元上映射一个第一符号。发送端设备将该P个第一符号使用M个天线端口发送，每个天线端口发送对应的N个资源单元上映射的N个符号。
将第一星座点对应的矩阵记为矩阵X，该矩阵X中包括P个第一符号，假设矩阵X是M*N矩阵。对于第m行的N列第一符号，N列第一符号与N个资源单元一一对应，一列第一符号对应一个资源单元，将其中每列第一符号分别映射在对应的资源单元上，N列第一符号映射在N个资源单元上。发送端设备可以将矩阵X中第m行的N列第一符号通过对应的天线端口发送，从而，将M行的N列第一符号通过一一对应的M个天线端口发送。
其中，N个资源单元与P个第一符号之间的对应关系可以是通信协议定义或系统规定的。
作为示例而非限定，参考图6的右图，可以将N列符号依次映射在基于先频域后时域的方式确定的资源单元上，有助于快速解调；或者，参考图6的左图，也可以将N列符号依次映射在基于先时域后频域的方式确定的资源单元上，有利于提高解调性能。
当需要将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元分组，得到t个调制资源块时，第一待调制比特可以是该待传输比特流的部分比特或全部比特，可以将针对该第一待调制比特进行调制得到的P个第一符号映射在其中一个调制资源块(记为第一调制资源块)上，第一调制资源块占用的资源单元即为N个资源单元。步骤A1中第二步中描述了根据比特数，确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的方式，也就是说，每个待调制比特可以承载在对应的调制资源块上，因此，在资源映射过程中，可以将该P个第一符号映射在对应的第一调制资源块上。
当不需要将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元分组时，只有一个调制资源块，第一待调制比特可以是该待传输比特流，可以将该待传输比特流映射至N个资源单元上。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，对于接收端设备而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，接收端设备可以基于上述确定第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，或者，若接收端设备为 终端设备，也可以基于方式2确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的第一待调制比特，其中，关于从第一星座图中确定第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
应理解，当第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特时，接收端设备获得其他待调制比特的过程与接收端设备获得第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
实施例2
在该实施例中，发送端设备可以基于上述方式2确定第一星座图。该实施例可以用于上行传输，发送端设备为终端设备。
步骤A1：确定第一待调制比特。
由于星座点与比特数之间有对应关系，因此，在该实施例中，发送端设备可以通过星座图确定比特数u，根据u确定第一待调制比特。
可选地，该第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，L 1＝2 u，u为正整数；以及，
该确定第一待调制比特，包括：
根据u和待传输比特流，确定该第一待调制比特，该待传输比特流包括该第一待调制比特，或，该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特。
待传输比特流包括第一待调制比特可以有如下解释：一种解释为，待传输比特流仅包括第一待调制比特，即，该第一待调制比特为该待传输比特流；另一种解释为，待传输比特流不仅包括第一待调制比特，还可以包括其他比特，这种情况中，该第一待调制比特为该待传输比特流的部分比特。
待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定第一待调制比特可以有如下解释：待传输比特流中的至少部分比特可以是该待传输比特流中的全部比特或部分比特；该至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特，可以是该至少部分比特本身为该第一待调制比特，也可以是对该至少部分比特做处理(例如，信道编码和/或加扰)后得到该第一待调制比特。在情况A中的所有实施例中，可以以该至少部分比特本身为该第一待调制比特的情况为例进行描述。
在该步骤中，终端设备可以根据该第一星座图确定该第一星座图对应的第一比特数u，根据u，从待传输比特流中获取比特数为u的第一待调制比特。
当u为待传输比特流的比特数u t时，将该待传输比特流作为该第一待调制比特。
当u小于待传输比特流的比特数u t时，从该待传输比特流中截取比特数为u的第一待调制比特，该第一待调制比特为该待传输比特的部分比特。
具体地，在这种情况中，如前所述，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量大于一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，可以将该时频资源进行分组，得到多个调制资源块(例如，t个调制资源块)，根据每个调制资源块对应的比特数确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，第一待调制比特为该t个调制资源块中的第一调制资源块承载的待调制比特。其中，获得t个调制资源块的过程的具体描述可以参考实施例1中的相关描述，根据比特数u确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的过程可以参考实施例1中的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
其中，终端设备确定第一星座图的方式可以参考上文中关于确定第一星座图的方式2的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
该实施例可以很好地适用于一次性无法传输完整数据的场景中。例如，在一次业务中，一个完整的业务数据的比特数会比较大，对于有限的资源单元而言，一次性将完整的业务数据传输完毕可能会影响数据的传输性能，因此，在这种情况中，可以将完整的业务数据分多次传输，待传输比特流可以为任一次传输的业务数据，但是，对于终端设备来说，可能并不知道当前可以传输多少比特数的业务数据，需要按照网络设备的相关配置才能完成一次传输，一次传输的业务数据可能是完整的业务数据中的一部分业务数据。因此，在这种场景中，通过网络设备发送的星座图可以确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的比特数，以及，通过网络设备的其他配置确定调制资源块的数量，从而，可以确定每个调制资源块上的待调制比特，进而，完成业务数据的一次传输。
步骤A2:调制(获得P个第一符号)
在该步骤中，发送端设备可以从基于方式2确定的第一星座图中，基于该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定第一待调制比特的第一比特值对应的第一星座点，从而，获得该第一星座点对应的P个第一符号，完成针对该第一待调制比特的调制过程。
步骤A3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考上述实施例1中关于步骤A3和具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明。对于接收端设备(即，网络设备)而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，接收端设备可以基于上述2种确定第一星座图的方式中的方式2确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的第一待调制比特。其中，关于从第一星座图中确定P个第一符号对应的第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
当第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特时，接收端设备获得其他待调制比特的过程与接收端设备获得该第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
情况B：调制+加扰+资源映射
在这种情况中，对第一待调制比特的处理过程包括确定第一待调制比特、对该第一待调制比特的调制、加扰和资源映射过程，下面，基于加扰方式的不同，将实施例分为两个大实施例，即，实施例3和实施例4，同时，在每个大实施例中，基于确定星座图的不同方式，将每个大实施例分为两个小实施例进行描述。其中，两个大实施例的主要区别在于，如图10所示，实施例3是调制和加扰联合进行，如图11所示，实施例4是在调制后加扰。
实施例3(对应图10)
在该实施例中，调制和加扰联合进行。
星座图的设计不仅考虑了对待调制比特的调制，也考虑了对待调制比特的加扰，也就是说，星座图不仅和比特数、天线端口的数量以及资源单元的数量有关，也和加扰参数有关。
在一种可能的设计中，第一星座图中的星座点是基于第一加扰序列对第二星座图 中的星座点加扰得到的，该第二星座图中每个星座点对应P个符号。其中，该第一加扰序列包括P个加扰元素，该P个加扰元素与每个星座点的P个符号一一地对应，每个加扰元素分别对应于一个符号。
也就是说，在星座图的设计中，第一星座图是基于第二星座图和第一加扰序列生成的。
第二星座图可以是网络设备为终端设备配置的、通信协议定义或系统规定的一个星座图，根据第二星座图和不同的加扰序列可以得到新的星座图。例如，根据第二星座图和加扰序列A得到星座图A，根据第二星座图和加扰序列B得到星座图B，根据第二星座图和加扰序列C得到星座图C，作为示例而非限定，具体实现中，将第二星座图与加扰序列作为一个函数的中的两个输入参数，通过函数运算得到一个新的星座图。星座图A、星座图B和星座图C都是基于第二星座图和不同的加扰序列得到的新的星座图。新的星座图与第二星座图都可以用于对同一个待调制比特进行调制，新的星座图和第二星座图都对应相同的天线端口的数量、资源单元的数量和比特数。区别在于，新的星座图还用于对待调制比特进行加扰。可以这么理解，每个新的星座图都可以理解为是对第二星座图通过对应的加扰序列做旋转后得到的星座图。以第一加扰序列为例，假设，第二星座图中每个星座点对应的矩阵可以表示为Ci，矩阵Ci包括P个符号，每个符号分别对应该第一加扰序列的一个加扰元素，第一星座图中每个星座点对应的矩阵可以表示为Xi，将矩阵Ci中的每个符号与该第一加扰序列中对应的加扰元素分别通过计算(例如，相乘或求和)得到的新的星座点对应的矩阵Xi中的符号，得到第一星座图。
下面，对第一加扰序列做进一步的相关描述。
可选地，该第一加扰序列的P个加扰元素不完全相同。
该P个加扰元素可以都不相同，也可以部分相同。例如，该P个加扰元素中的一部分加扰元素是一个值，另一部分加扰元素是另一个值。再例如，该P个加扰元素中除第q个加扰元素的值以外的值都相同，例如，q＝1、2、3或其它小于P的整数。
可选地，该第一加扰序列可以基于第一加扰参数确定。
示例性地，第一加扰序列的第h项元素可以表示为：
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000020
其中，h是取值为1至P的整数，c是根据第一加扰参数初始化确定的的伪随机序列，c的长度为2P，c 2h-1表示伪随机序列中的第2h-1项元素，c 2h表示伪随机序列c中的第2h项元素，j表示虚数单位，j的平方等于-1。
例如，伪随机序列c的第n项元素可以表示为：
c(n)＝(x 1(n+N C)+x 2(n+N C))mod 2
其中，Nc＝1600,x 1(0)＝1，x 1(i)＝0,i＝1,2,...,30，x 1(n+31)＝(x 1(n+3)+x 1(n))mod 2，x 2(n+31)＝(x 2(n+3)+x 2(n+2)+x 2(n+1)+x 2(n))mod 2，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000021
例如，第一加扰参数可以是c init。这样，可以通过c init确定x 2(i)，通过x 2(i)＝0,i＝0,1,...,30、x 1(i)＝0,i＝1,2,...,30、Nc＝1600、x 1(0)＝1、x 1(n+31)＝(x 1(n+3)+x 1(n))mod 2和x 2(n+31)＝(x 2(n+3)+x 2(n+2)+x 2(n+1)+x 2(n))mod 2确定c(n)。
可选地，第一加扰序列可以是第一加扰参数以及资源单元的编号(例如，时域单元和/或频域单元的编号)的函数。示例性地，第一加扰序列可以基于c init生成，c init为第一加扰参数和资源单元的编号的线性组合，例如，c init＝c 1*第一加扰参数+c 1*资源单元的编号，c 1和c 1都为常数，资源单元的编号可以是整数，例如，资源单元的编号可以是0、1、2等。可选地，还可以根据其他方式生成加扰序列，这里不作限定。
可选地，第一加扰参数可以根据以下至少一项确定：终端设备的ID(例如，小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier，C-RNTI))、网络设备配置的终端设备的ID、用于发送所述P个第一符号或P个第二符号的时间单元(例如，时隙、迷你时隙、帧或符号)的编号、用于发送所述P个第一符号或P个第二符号的RB的编号、调制资源块的编号。例如，第一加扰参数可以是以上任一项，或者，第一加扰参数也可以是以上至少两项的线性组合，示例性地，第一加扰参数＝a 1*时间单元的编号+b 1*RB的编号，示例性地，时间单元的编号和RB的编号可以是整数，a 1和b 1为常数。
可选地，第一加扰序列中的P个加扰元素的幅值相同，和/或，P个加扰元素的相位是根据该第一加扰参数确定的。
例如，第一加扰序列的第h项元素的相位可以表示为：
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000022
其中，h是取值为1至P的整数，c是根据第一加扰参数确定的伪随机序列，c的长度为2P，c 2h-1表示伪随机序列中的第2h-1项，c 2h表示伪随机序列c中的第2h项，第一加扰参数可以是c init，c init以及确定c的方式可以参考上文的相关描述，不再赘述。
基于这种星座图的设计方式，对于上述方式1和方式2，需要进一步基于该第一加扰参数确定该第一星座图。
下面，分别针对上述方式1和方式2，对进一步基于第一加扰参数确定第一星座图的方式进行详细说明，将基于第一加扰参数确定第一星座图的方式记为方式1-A和方式2-A，其中，方式1-A可以对应方式1，方式2-A可以对应方式2。
方式1-A
在一种可能的设计中，发送端设备或接收端设备根据M或N中的至少一个和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图；或者，发送端设备或接收端设备根据u和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图；或者，发送端设备或接收端设备根据M或N中的至少一个、第一比特数u和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图。
如前所述，在星座图的设计中，第一星座图的设计是基于第二星座图和第一加扰序列确定的，在该方式中，虽然不需要基于M或N中的至少一个和/或u确定第二星座图，但是，为了便于理解，可以将与M或N中的至少一个和/或u有关的星座图理解为第二星座图，进一步将与第二星座图和第一加扰参数有关的星座图理解为第一星座图。
具体而言，发送端设备或接收端设备可以根据第一加扰参数，如：终端设备的ID、时间单元的编号、RB的编号、调制资源块的编号中的至少一项，确定第一加扰序列。其中，第一加扰序列可以参上文关于确定第一加扰序列的具体描述，不再赘述。由于星座图是根据加扰参数对应的加扰序列得到的，可以理解一个加扰参数对应一个星座图，因此，可以根据该第一加扰参数确定对应的星座图。为了简化描述，以下，以根据M或N中的至少一个、第一比特数u和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图为例针对加扰 和调制联合进行的相关实施例进行描述。
在另一种可能的设计中，发送端设备或接收端设备可以根据M或N中的至少一个和/或u确定第二星座图，再根据第二星座图和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图。例如，根据第一加扰参数确定第一加扰序列，通过第一加扰序列对第二星座图进行加扰，得到第一星座图。
其中，关于根据M或N中的至少一个、和/或u确定第二星座图的具体描述可以参考方式1的相关描述，此处不再赘述，这里的第二星座图可以理解为方式1中的第一星座图。
方式2-A
该方式可以适用于进行上行传输或下行传输中的终端设备，在该方式中，终端设备可以通过网络设备发送的信令确定第一星座图。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备向终端设备发送第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示第一星座图，该第一星座图是基于第二星座图和第一加扰参数生成的。
其中，该第五指示信息可以是方式2中的第一指示信息，或，第二指示信息和第三指示信息，或，第四指示信息，关于每种指示信息的具体描述可以参考方式2中关于每种指示信息的相关描述，不再赘述。区别在于，该方式中的第一星座图是基于第二星座图和第一加扰参数生成的。
在另一种可能的设计中，网络设备向终端设备发送指示第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示第二星座图。示例性地，第二星座图可以是基于M或N中的至少一个和/或u得到的。
终端设备根据该第二星座图和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图。例如，根据第一加扰参数确定第一加扰序列，通过第一加扰序列对第二星座图进行加扰，得到第一星座图。
也就是说，终端设备可以根据通过信令确定第二星座图，进一步根据第二星座图和第一加扰参数确定第一星座图。
其中，这种设计中的第六指示信息的指示方式可以是方式2中的第一指示信息的指示方式(例如，第二星座图对应的矩阵值，或，第二星座图对应的索引)，或，第二指示信息的指示方式和第三指示信息的指示方式(例如，第二星座图对应的的索引)，或，第四指示信息的指示方式(例如，将M和对应M的第二星座图的进行联合编码)，关于每种指示信息的指示方式的具体描述可以参考方式2中关于每种指示信息的指示方式的相关描述，不再赘述。区别在于，该方式中通过第六指示信息指示的是第二星座图，将方式2中的第一星座图替换为这里的第二星座图即可。
下面，以确定该第一星座图的2种方式(方式1-A和方式2-A)，基于实施例3-A和实施例3-B，对本申请实施例进行详细说明。
实施例3-A
在该实施例中，调制和加扰联合进行，发送端设备可以基于上述方式1-A确定该第一星座图。
步骤B1：确定第一待调制比特
该步骤的实现方式与情况A中实施例1的步骤A1实现方式相同，具体描述可以参考关于实施例1中步骤A1的描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤B2：调制+加扰(获得P个第一符号)
在该步骤中，发送端设备根据方式1-A确定该第一星座图，根据该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定该第一待调制比特的比特值对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，该第一星座图是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的星座点加扰得到的，所以，该P个第一符号是基于对该第一待调制比特进行调制和加扰后得到的符号。
因此，本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法，通过对基本星座图(例如，第二星座图)采用加扰序列加扰得到新的星座图，实现了对基本星座图的旋转，不同的加扰序列可以得到不同的新的星座图，起到了伪随机的作用。针对第一待调制比特而言，即使在M、N和u相同的情况下，发送端设备可以通过用于确定第一加扰序列的第一加扰参数进一步确定第一星座图，实现了非相干传输中不同用户之间的干扰随机化。
步骤B3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以该第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，对于接收端设备而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，该接收端设备可以基于确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1-A确定该第一星座图，或者，若该接收端设备为终端设备，也可以基于方式2-A确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，该P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特，其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
应理解，当该第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特时，接收端设备获得其他待调制比特的过程与该接收端设备获得该第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
实施例3-B
在该实施例中，调制和加扰联合进行，发送端设备可以基于上述方式2-A确定第一星座图，该实施例可以用于上行传输，发送端设备为终端设备。
步骤B1：确定第一待调制比特
由于对星座图中每个星座点对应的符号进行加扰并不会影响星座点对应的比特数，因此，发送端设备可以基于方式2-A的一种可能的设计中网络设备发送的指示信息确定第一星座图，基于第一星座图确定第一待调制比特的第一比特数u，或者，发送端设备可以基于方式2-A的另一种可能的设计中网络设备发送的第六指示信息确定第二星座图，由于第二星座图对应的比特数u与第一星座图对应的比特数u相同，发送端设备可以基于第二星座图确定第一待调制比特的第一比特数u。
其中，基于u和待传输比特流确定第一待调制比特的具体描述可以参考实施例2中步骤A1的相关描述，不再赘述。
步骤B2：调制+加扰(获得P个第一符号)
该发送端设备可以从基于方式2-A确定的第一星座图中，根据该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定该第一待调制比特的比特值对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，该第一星座图是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的 星座点加扰得到的星座图，因此，该P个第一符号是基于对该第一待调制比特进行调制和加扰后得到的符号。
步骤B3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于这个步骤的具体描述可以参考实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以该第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，对于接收端设备(即，网络设备)而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，该接收端设备可以基于上述2种确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1-A确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，该P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特，其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
应理解，当该第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特时，该接收端设备获得其他待调制比特的过程与该接收端设备获得该第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
实施例4(对应图11)
在该实施例中，先调制后加扰。下面，以确定该第一星座图的2种方式(方式1和方式2)，基于实施例4-A和实施例4-B，对本申请实施例进行详细说明。
实施例4-A
在该实施例中，先调制后加扰，发送端设备可以基于上述方式1确定第一星座图。
步骤B1：确定第一待调制比特
该步骤的实现方式与情况A中的实施例1中的步骤A1实现方式相同，具体描述可以参考关于实施例1中步骤A1的描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤B2：调制(获得P个第一符号)
与实施例3的区别在于，实施例4中的针对该第一待调制比特的调制与加扰不同步，星座图的设计的与加扰序列无关，发送端设备基于上述方式1确定第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1的步骤A2，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤B3：加扰(获得P个第二符号)
在该步骤中，发送端设备使用第二加扰序列，对将该第一待调制比特调制后获得的P个第一符号进行加扰，获得P个第二符号。
其中，该第二加扰序列包括P个加扰元素，该P个加扰元素与该P个第一符号一一对应，一个加扰元素地对应一个第一符号。该第二加扰序列可以基于第二加扰参数确定，作为示例而非限定，该第二加扰参数可以根据以下至少一项确定：终端设备的ID、网络设备配置的终端设备的ID、时间单元(例如，时隙、迷你时隙、帧或符号)的编号、RB的编号、调制资源块的编号。例如，第二加扰参数可以是以上任一项，或者，第二加扰参数也可以是以上至少两项的线性组合，示例性地，第二加扰参数＝a 2*时间单元的编号+b 2*RB的编号，示例性地，时间单元的编号和RB的编号可以是整数，a 2和b 2为常数。
将该P个加扰元素中的每个加扰元素与对应的每个第一符号通过计算(例如，相乘或求和)得到P个第二符号。例如，假设，P个加扰元素中第i个加扰元素为a i，对应的第一符号为x i，加扰后的符号为y i＝x i*f(a i)，其中，f(a i)的模固定(例如，模为1)，相位由a i决定，例如，f(a i)＝exp(2*a i*j*p i/R)，其中，R为正整数。假设，P＝6，P个第一符号为[x 1,x 2,x 3,x 4,x 5,x 6]，下面示出了两个不同的加扰序列中的P个加扰元素的对该P个第一符号加扰得到的结果。需要说明的是，由于exp()运算是以2*p i为周期重复的，因此f(a i)等效的相位为[(2*ai)mod R]*p i/R，其中，pi为圆周率，mod表示取模运算。
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000023
其中，θ i和
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000024
分别为两个加扰序列的第i项的相位，对i取遍1至6，j为虚数单数，虚数单位的平方等于-1。
下面，对该第二加扰序列做进一步的相关描述。
可选地，该第二加扰序列的P个加扰元素不完全相同。
可选地，该第二加扰序列可以是该第二加扰参数以及用于发送P个第一符号或P个第二符号的资源单元的编号(和/或时频域编号)的函数。示例性地，第二加扰序列可以基于c init生成，c init为第二加扰参数和资源单元的编号的线性组合，例如，c init＝c 3*第一加扰参数+c 4*资源单元的编号，c 3和c 4都为常数，资源单元的编号可以是整数，例如，资源单元的编号可以是0、1、2等。其中，关于基于c init确定第二加扰序列的具体描述可以参考实施例3中基于c init确定第一加扰序列的相关描述，不再赘述。可选地，该P个加扰元素不完全相同。
可选地，该第二加扰序列中的P个加扰元素的幅值相同，和/或，该P个加扰元素的相位是根据该第二加扰参数确定的。
其中，关于根据第二加扰参数确定p个加扰元素的相位的具体描述可以参考实施例3中基于第一加扰参数确定P个加扰元素的相位的相关描述，不再赘述。
可选地，该第二加扰序列的长度为P，或者，该第二加扰序列的长度大于P。
在第一种情况中，一个加扰序列的长度可以为一个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量(或者说，一个调制资源块的长度)与天线端口的数数量的乘积，此种情况中，该第二加扰序列仅包括该P个加扰元素。
在第二种情况中，一个加扰序列的长度可以为多个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量与天线端口的数量的乘积，这种情况中，该第二加扰序列不仅包括该P个加扰元素，也包括其他加扰元素，其他加扰元素用于对其他调制资源块承载的符号进行加扰。这里，该多个调制资源块可以是承载上文所述的待传输比特流的所有调制资源块，也可以是承载该待传输比特流的所有调制资源块中的部分调制资源块，也可以是承载该待传输比特流的所有调制资源块和承载其他待传输比特流的调制资源块。其中，承载该待传输比特流的所有调制资源块可以是一个调制资源块或多个调制资源块，一个调制资源块对应的是对用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源不分组的情况，多个调制资源块对应的是对用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源分组或对传输待传输比特流重复传输的情况。
因此，本申请实施例提供的传输信息的方法，通过采用第二加扰序列对调制后的P个 第一符号进行加扰，可以实现对该P个第一符号的旋转，从而，实现非相干传输中不同用户之间的干扰随机化。
步骤B4：资源映射，发送P个第二符号
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。区别在于，将情况A中实施例1中步骤A3中的P个第一符号替换为这里的P个第二符号。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，对于接收端设备而言，接收到P个第二符号后，需要使用第二加扰序列对该P个第二符号解扰，获得P个第一符号。该接收端设备可以基于上文确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，或者，若该接收端设备为终端设备，也可以基于方式2确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特，其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
应理解，当该第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特时，接收端设备获得其他待调制比特的过程与该接收端设备获得该第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
实施例4-B
在该实施例中，先调制后加扰，发送端设备可以基于上述方式2确定第一星座图，该实施例可以用于上行传输，发送端设备为终端设备。
步骤B1：确定第一待调制比特
该步骤的实现方式与情况A中的实施例2中的步骤A1实现方式相同，具体描述可以参考实施例2中步骤A1的描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤B2：调制(获得P个第一符号)
该发送端设备可以从基于方式2确定的第一星座图中，确定该第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，该步骤可以参考情况A中实施例2的步骤A2，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤B3：加扰(获得P个第二符号)
在该步骤中，发送端设备使用第二加扰序列，对将该第一待调制比特调制后获得的P个第一符号进行加扰，获得P个第二符号。
其中，具体描述可以参考实施例4-A中步骤B3的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤B4：资源映射，发送P个第二符号
具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。区别在于，将情况A中实施例1中步骤A3中的P个第一符号替换为这里的P个第二符号。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，对于接收端设备(即，网络设备)而言，接收到P个第二符号后，需要使用第二加扰序列对该P个第二符号解扰，获得P个第一符号。该接收端设备可以基于上文2种确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座 图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特，其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
应理解，当该第一待调制比特为待传输比特流的部分比特时，接收端设备获得其他待调制比特的过程与该接收端设备获得该第一待调制比特的过程相同，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
情况C：信道编码+调制+加扰+资源映射
在这种情况中，可以通过对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码获得第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特进行调制、对将调制后得到的P个第一符号进行加扰、和将对P个第一符号加扰后得到的P个第二符号进行资源映射。或者，可以通过对该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰获得该第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特进行调制和将调制后得到的P个第一符号进行资源映射。
在非相干传输中，针对待传输比特流，若仅使用少量的调制资源块，则可以不需要对该待传输比特流进行信道编码，也能获得足够的性能，若需要使用多个调制资源块，则可以对该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，有利于对抗信道衰落。
基于此，在一种可能的设计中，在确定使用t个资源单元组传输待传输比特流时，对该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，以获得第一待调制比特，该t个资源单元组中每个资源单元组包括多个资源单元，用于承载第一待调制资源的N个资源单元为该t个资源单元组中任一个资源单元组中的资源单元，t大于预设值。
也就是说，只有在用于传输该传输比特流的调制资源块(即，资源单元组)的数量t大于预设值的情况下，发送端设备才对该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码。
在一种可能的设计中，该预设值为1、2、3、4或者更大的整数值，本申请实施例不做限制。。
也就是说，在这种情况中，在使用一个调制资源块传输该待传输比特流时，可以不需要对该待传输比特流进行信道编码，当使用多个调制资源块传输该待传输比特流时，可以对该待传输比特流进行信道编码。
在本申请实施例中，针对情况C中信道编码、调制和加扰的先后顺序，分别以3个大实施例(即，实施例5、实施例6和实施例7)对本申请实施例进行详细说明。此外，在每个实施例中，基于确定星座图的不同方式，将每个大实施例分为两个小实施例进行描述。
为了便于理解，首先，对3个大实施例的主要步骤做简单说明。参考图12，实施例5的主要步骤是：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，以确定第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特联合进行调制和加扰，将得到的P个第一符号进行资源映射；参考图13，实施例6的主要步骤是：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，以确定第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特先调制后加扰，将得到的P个第二符号进行资源映射；参考图14，实施例7的主要步骤是：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰，以确定第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特进行调制，将得到的P个第一符号进行资源映射。
基于上述思路，对每个实施例进行详细描述。
实施例5(对应图12)
在该实施例中，发送端设备对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，以确定第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特联合进行调制和加扰，将得到的P个第一符号进行资源映射调制。
其中，可以通过对该第一星座图的设计来实现对该第一待调制比特的调制和加扰。
在一种可能的设计中，第一星座图中的星座点是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的星座点加扰得到的，该第二星座图中每个星座点对应P个符号。
其中，该第一加扰序列包括P个加扰元素，该P个加扰元素与每个星座点的P个符号一一对应，一个加扰元素对应一个符号。
关于该第一星座图、该第二星座图以及该第一加扰序列的具体描述，可以参考实施例3中针对该第一星座图、该第二星座图以及该第一加扰序列的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
基于这种星座图的设计方式，可以基于上文所述的方式1-A和方式2-A确定该第一星座图。
下面，以确定该第一星座图的2种方式(方式1-A和方式2-A)，基于实施例5-A和实施例5-B，对本申请实施例进行详细说明。为了便于区分与理解，可以将对待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的比特流记为编码比特流，将对待传输比特流分组后的比特进行信道编码后得到的比特记为编码比特。
实施例5-A
在该实施例中，调制和加扰联合进行，发送端设备可以基于上述方式1-A确定第一星座图。
步骤C1：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，确定第一待调制比特
在该步骤中，可以有两种方式(即，方式5-1和方式5-2)确定第一待调制比特，两种方式的主要区别在于，方式5-1是对待传输比特流进行信道编码，将基于信道编码得到的编码比特流分组或不分组，以得到第一待调制比特；方式5-2是在信道编码之前，将待传输比特流中分组或不分组的比特进行信道编码得到新的比特(编码比特流或编码比特)，从而确定第一待调制比特。当基于方式5-1确定第一待调制比特时，待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特；当基于方式5-2确定第一待调制比特时，若对待传输比特流分组，则待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的部分比特，若对待传输比特流不分组，则待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特。
方式5-1(编码后分组或不分组)
在该方式中，发送端对待传输比特流进行信道编码，得到编码比特流，可以基于是否将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源分组的情况，对编码比特流分组或不分组，从而，确定第一待调制比特。
其中，编码信息可以包括码率和编码方式。码率r表示编码前的比特与编码后的比特的比值，例如，待传输比特流的比特数为u t，编码比特流的比特数为u x，则码率r＝u t/u x。编码方式可以是RM(reed muller)码，重复编码，卷积码，turbo码，极 化(polar)码，低密度奇偶校验码(low density parity check code，LDPC)码等。
由于实际传输时，用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源所包括的资源单元的数量可能多于一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，这种情况中，可以将该时频资源所包括的资源单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块。基于此，对于编码比特流，在一种可能的设计中，可以将该编码比特流分为多个组，多组编码比特一一地对应多个调制资源块，编码比特组的组数等于调制资源块的个数，每个调制资源块承载对应的一组编码比特，针对每组编码比特分别进行调制、加扰和资源映射。这里，任一组编码比特即为该第一待调制比特。在另一种可能的设计中，不需要对编码比特流分组，可以将该编码比特流作为第一待调制比特。当用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量多于一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量时，可以对该编码比特流进行重复传输，重复传输的次数为调制资源块的数量，每次传输采用一个调制资源块，任意两次传输采用不同的调制资源块，每次传输中，对该编码比特流联合进行调制和加扰，将得到的符号映射到对应的调制资源块上。
若用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，也可以不需要对编码比特流分组，将该编码比特流作为一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，这里，该编码比特流即为该第一待调制比特。
针对将编码比特流分组的情况，需要确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特(即，编码比特)，其中，第一待调制比特为任一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1中步骤A1中关于确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的过程，区别在于，这里的待调制比特为编码比特，实施例1中的待调制比特为未编码的比特。
在确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的过程中，当将实施例中步骤A1中关于确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数的第一种方式和第二种方式应用于该实施例时，需要基于该实施例的信道编码过程做适应性调整。下面，对这两种确定每个调制资源块的比特数的方式做简单说明，主要指出区别之处，其余地方的具体描述可以继续参考实施例1的步骤A1中关于确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数的第一种方式和第二种方式的相关描述。
第一种方式
在一种可能的设计中，发送端设备根据待传输比特流的比特数u t、码率r和用于承载待传输比特流的调制资源块的数量t，确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数N 0。
例如，u 0＝u x/t，其中，u x＝u t/r，u x表示编码后的待传输比特流(即，编码比特流)的比特数。由于是对将该待传输比特流进行信道编码后的编码比特流分组，因此，需要基于u x＝u t/r确定编码比特的比特数。
当u x无法整除t时，可以使其中一个调制资源块对应的比特数大于或小于其他调制资源块对应的比特数。
第二种方式
该方式可以适用于发送端设备为终端设备的情况。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备向终端设备发送用于指示每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量的资源指示信息、用于指示用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元的调度信息和用于指示码率的码率信息，该终端设备根据该资源指示信息、该调度信息和该码率信息确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数。或者，该码率信息可以是预配置的，即无需网络设备向终 端设备发送。
作为示例而非限定，系统或通信协议可以规定，每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量N 0与用于传输待传输比特流的资源单元的数量N t可以共同对应该待传输比特流的比特数u t，该对应关系可以通过例如表格的方式呈现，例如，在表格中，行表示N t列表示N 0，一个特定的N t和特定的N 0对应一个u t，这样，终端设备可以通过N 0与N t确定u t；根据t＝N t/N 0的比值可以确定调制资源块的数量t；根据u 0＝u x/t的比值可以确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数u 0，其中，u x＝u t/r，u x表示编码后的待传输比特流(即，编码比特流)的比特数，r为码率。
其中，该资源指示信息和该码率信息可以是独立的信令，也可以是承载于其他信息中的信令。
作为示例而非限定，该资源指示信息和该码率信息可以是调制编码方案(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)配置信息中的信令，该MCS配置信息中的资源指示信息所指示的每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量可以理解为对待调制比特进行调制的调制方式。由于一个MCS配置信息指示一种MCS，具体实现中，可以通过MCS和N t指示u t。例如，可以采用查表的方式，表中的行表示N t，列表示MCS。其中，关于MCS、N t与u t的关系可以参考上文关于表5的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
上述通过资源指示信息指示的N 0和调度信息指示的N t确定u 0的方式仅为示意性说明，例如，终端设备可以通过频谱效率、N 0和r确定u 0。具体地，通过频谱效率和N 0确定一个调制资源块对应的编码前的比特数。例如，一个调制资源块对应的编码前比特数等于频谱效率与N0个资源单元占用的资源数量的乘积，其中，N0个资源单元占用的资源数量的单位为赫兹*秒(Hz*s)，频谱效率的单位为比特/秒/赫兹(bit/s/Hz)，根据一个调制资源块对应的编码前的比特数和r确定一个调制资源块对应的编码后的比特数u 0，或者，终端设备可以通过频谱效率和N t确定u t，根据u x＝u t/r确定编码比特流的比特数u x，根据u 0＝u x/t确定u 0。
在另一种可能的设计中，终端设备根据每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量、用于传输待传输比特流的MCS和用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量，确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数，其中，该MCS还用于指示码率。
作为示例而非限定，系统或通信协议可以规定，用于传输待传输比特流的MCS与用于传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的数量N t可以共同对应该待传输比特流的比特数u t，该对应关系可以通过例如表格的方式呈现，例如，在表格中，行表示N t，列表示MCS，一个特定的MCS和特定的N t对应一个u t，可以参考表6的相关描述，这样，终端设备可以根据MCS与N t确定u t；根据资源指示信息确定每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量N 0，根据t＝N t/N 0的比值可以确定调制资源块的数量t；根据u 0＝u x/t的比值可以确定每个调制资源块对应的比特数u 0，其中，u x＝u t/r，u x表示编码后的待传输比特流(即，编码比特 流)的比特数，r为码率。
关于信道编码的过程，作为示例而非限定，待传输比特流的比特数为u t，发送端设备对待传输比特流的信道编码过程可以如下：若u t为1～2，则可以采用重复码传输；若u t为3～11，则可以采用RM码进行信道编码；若u t大于12，则可以采用Polar码的方式编码。编码的过程会将待传输比特流转换成编码后的编码比特流，该编码比特流的比特数为u x，其中，u x≥u t，且u x的值是根据调制方式以及资源映射确定的，例如，调制阶数为k，可以用于数据传输的资源单元(例如，RE的时频资源)的数量为R，则u x＝k*R。
方式5-2(编码前分组或不分组)
在该方式中，基于需要将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块的情况，在一种可能的设计中，可以将待传输比特流分为多组，多组比特对应多个调制资源块，每个调制资源块承载将对应的每组比特采用编码信息进行信道编码后的编码比特，针对每组编码比特进行调制、加扰和资源映射。这里，该第一待调制比特为将任一组比特进行信道编码后得到的编码比特。在另一种可能的设计中，不需要对待传输比特流分组，将对该待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流作为第一待调制比特，可以对该编码比特流进行重复传输，重复传输的次数为调制资源块的数量。每次传输采用一个调制资源块，任意两次传输采用不同的调制资源块，每次传输中，对该编码比特流进行调制，将调制后的符号映射到对应的调制资源块上。
若用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，也可以不需要对该待传输比特流分组，将基于该待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流作为一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，这里，第一待调制比特为将待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流。
针对将待传输比特流分组的情况，需要确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特(即，编码比特或编码比特流)，其中，第一待调制比特为任一个调制资源块承载的编码比特或编码比特流，具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1中步骤A1中关于确定每个调制资源块承载待调制比特的过程，为了简洁，不再赘述。区别在于，这里的待调制比特为编码比特或编码比特流，实施例1中的待调制比特为未编码的比特。
其中，关于信道编码的过程，可以参考方式5-1中的相关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。不过，与方式5-1的区别在于，方式5-1的编码信息是针对待传输比特流的编码信息，在方式5-2中，若对待传输比特流分组，这里的编码信息是针对分组后的一组比特的编码信息，若对待传输比特流不分组，这里的编码信息是针对待传输比特流的编码信息。
步骤C2：调制+加扰(获得P个第一符号)
该步骤的实现方式与情况B中实施例3-A中的步骤B2的实现方式相同，具体描述可以参考实施例3-A中步骤B2的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤C3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于这个步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，应理解，当该第一待调制比特为对待传输比特流分组的其中一组比 特进行信道编码后的编码比特时，或者，当该第一待调制比特为对待传输比特流进行信道编码得到的编码比特流分组的一组编码比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对该第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，完成针对待传输比特流的处理，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
对于接收端设备而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，接收端设备可以基于确定第一星座图的方式中的方式1-A确定第一星座图，或者，若接收端设备为终端设备，也可以基于方式2-A确定第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的第一待调制比特，并且，根据编码信息和该第一待调制比特获得未编码的比特。其中，关于从第一星座图中确定第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
下面，基于发送端设备确定第一待调制比特的两种方式，对接收端设备解码的相关内容做简单说明。
若发送端设备是基于方式5-1对待传输比特流进行信道编码后的编码比特流分组，对于接收端设备来说，需要获取所有调制资源块(例如，t个调制资源块)承载的待调制比特，将所有调制资源块承载的待调制比特整合为一个编码比特流，采用发送端设备使用的对待传输比特流进行信道编码的编码信息对该编码比特流解码，从而，获得未编码的待传输比特流。可以看出，在这种情况中，对第一待调制比特进行解码的编码信息可以是发送端设备使用的对待传输比特流进行信道编码的编码信息。
若发送端设备是基于方式5-2对待传输比特流分组，接收端设备使用发送端设备对每组比特进行信道编码的编码信息对每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特解码，从而，获得未编码的每组比特，从而，获得未编码的待传输比特流。可以看出，在这种情况中，接收端设备对每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特进行解码的编码信息是接收端设备使用发送端设备对每组比特进行信道编码的编码信息。
实施例5-B
在该实施例中，调制和加扰联合进行，发送端设备可以基于上述方式2-A确定第一星座图,该实施例可以用于上行传输，发送端设备为终端设备。
由于对星座图中每个星座点对应的符号进行加扰并不会影响星座点对应的比特数，因此，发送端设备可以基于方式2-A的一种可能的设计中网络设备发送的指示信息确定第一星座图，基于第一星座图确定第一待调制比特的第一比特数u，或者，发送端设备可以基于方式2-A的另一种可能的设计中网络设备发送的第六指示信息确定第二星座图，由于第二星座图对应的比特数u与第一星座图对应的比特数u相同，发送端设备可以基于第二星座图确定第一待调制比特的第一比特数u，确定该第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特联合进行调制和加扰，将得到的P个第一符号进行资源映射。
步骤C1:对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，确定第一待调制比特
在一种可能的设计中，该第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，L 1＝2 u，u为正整数；以及，
该确定第一待调制比特，包括：
根据u和待传输比特流，确定该第一待调制比特，该待传输比特流包括该第一待调制比特，或，该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特。
其中，在该实施例中，可以仅涉及待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定第一 待调制比特的情况。待传输比特流中的至少部分比特可以是该待传输比特流中的全部比特或部分比特；该至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特，可以是对该至少部分比特做信道编码处理后得到该第一待调制比特。
在根据第一比特数u和该待传输比特流确定该第一待调制比特的过程中，同实施例5-A，在该步骤中，也可以有两种方式(即，方式5-3和方式5-4)确定该第一待调制比特，两种方式的主要区别和实施例5-A中方式5-1与方式5-2的主要区别类似。
下面，通过方式5-3和方式5-4，对根据该第一星座图确定的第一比特数u和该待传输比特流确定该第一待调制比特的过程进行详细说明。
方式5-3(编码后分组或不分组)
在该方式中，发送端设备根据编码信息，对待传输比特流进行信道编码，得到编码比特流，基于方式2-A，根据网络设备的指示(例如，网络设备发送的第五指示信息或第六指示信息)确定第一星座图，基于该第一星座图确定对应的第一比特数u，从该编码比特流中获取比特数为u的第一待调制比特：当u等于该编码比特流的比特数u x时，将该编码比特流作为该第一待调制比特；当u小于该编码比特流的比特数u t时，从该编码比特流中截取比特数为u的编码比特，该第一待调制比特为该编码比特。其中，关于针对从该编码比特流中截取比特数为u的编码比特的具体描述可以参考参考实施例2中步骤A1的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述，区别在于，将上文中的待传输比特流类比于这里的编码比特流。
其中，关于信道编码的过程的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中步骤C1中关于信道编码的过程的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
方式5-4(编码前分组或不分组)
在该方式中，发送端设备基于方式2-A，根据网络设备的指示(例如，网络设备发送的第五指示信息或第六指示信息)确定第一星座图，基于该第一星座图确定对应的第一比特数u；根据u和码率r，确定未编码的比特的比特数u p，其中，u p＝u*r。若u p等于该待传输比特流的比特数u t，则将基于该待传输比特流进行信道编码后的编码比特流确定为该第一待调制比特；若u p小于该待传输比特流的比特数u t，则从该传输比特流中截取比特数为u p的比特，并根据编码信息，对截取的比特进行信道编码，获得编码比特，该编码比特即为该第一待调制比特。其中，关于从该传输比特流中截取比特数为u p的比特的具体描述可以参考实施例2中步骤A1的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述，区别在于，将上文中的比特数u类比于这里的比特数为u p。
其中，关于信道编码的过程的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中步骤C1中关于信道编码的过程的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C2：调制+加扰(获得P个第一符号)
发送端设备可以从基于上述方式2-A确定的第一星座图中，根据该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定第一待调制比特的比特值对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，该第一星座图是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的星座点加扰得到的，所以，该P个第一符号是基于对该第一待调制比特进行调制和加扰后得到的符号。
步骤C3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于这个步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，应理解，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流分组的其中一组比特进行信道编码后的编码比特时，或者，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流进行信道编码得到的编码比特流分组的一组编码比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对该第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，完成针对待传输比特流的处理，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
对于接收端设备(即，网络设备)而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，该接收端设备可以基于确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1-A确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特，并且，根据编码信息和该第一待调制比特获得未编码的比特。其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，以及，在发送端设备确定第一待调制比特的两种方式中，关于接收端设备解码的相关内容的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中关于接收端设备解码的相关内容的描述，为了简洁，此处都不再赘述。
实施例6(对应图13)
在该实施例中，发送端设备对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，以确定第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特调制，对将调制后得到的P个第一符号进行加扰，将加扰后得到的P个第二符号进行资源映射。
下面，基于确定该第一星座图的2种方式(方式1和方式2)，对实施例6-A和实施例6-B进行详细说明。
实施例6-A
在该实施例中，先调制后加扰，发送端设备可以基于上述方式1确定第一星座图。
步骤C1：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，确定第一待调制比特
该步骤的实现方式与实施例5-A中步骤C1的实现方式相同，具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中步骤C1的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤C2：调制(获得P个第一符号)
发送端设备可以基于上述方式1确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1关于步骤A2的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C3：加扰(获得P个第二符号)
在该步骤中，发送端设备使用第二加扰序列，对将第一待调制比特调制后获得的P个第一符号进行加扰，获得P个第二符号。
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考实施例4-A中关于步骤B3的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C4：资源映射，发送P个第二符号。
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。区别在于，将情况A中实施例1中步骤A3中的P个第一符号替换 为这里的P个第二符号。
上述，以该第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，应理解，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流分组的其中一组比特进行信道编码后的编码比特时，或者，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流进行信道编码得到的编码比特流分组的一组编码比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对该第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，完成针对待传输比特流的处理，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
对于接收端设备而言，接收到该P个第二符号后，需要使用第二加扰序列对该P个第二符号解扰，获得P个第一符号。该接收端设备可以基于确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，或者，若该接收端设备为终端设备，也可以基于方式2确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特。并且，接收端设备根据编码信息和该第一待调制比特获得未编码的比特。其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，以及，在发送端设备确定第一待调制比特的两种方式中，关于接收端设备解码的相关内容的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中关于接收端设备解码的相关内容的描述，为了简洁，此处都不再赘述。
实施例6-B
在该实施例中，先调制后加扰，发送端设备可以基于上述方式2确定第一星座图，该实施例可以用于上行传输，发送端设备为终端设备。
步骤C1：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码，确定第一待调制比特
该步骤的实现方式与实施例5-B中步骤C1的实现方式相同，具体描述可以参考实施例5-B中步骤C1的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤C2：调制(获得P个第一符号)
发送端设备从基于方式2获得的该第一星座图中，根据该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定该第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，该步骤可以参考情况A中实施例2的步骤A2，为了简洁，不再赘述。
步骤C3：加扰(获得P个第二符号)
在该步骤中，发送端设备使用第二加扰序列，对将第一待调制比特调制后获得的P个第一符号进行加扰，获得P个第二符号。
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考实施例4-A中关于步骤B3的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C4：资源映射，发送P个第二符号，
其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。区别在于，将情况A中实施例1中步骤A3中的P个第一符号替换为这里的P个第二符号。
上述，以该第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，应理解，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流分组的其中一组比特进行信道编码后的编码比特时，或者，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流进行信道编码得到的编码比特流分组的一组编码比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制 比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对该第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，完成针对待传输比特流的处理，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
对于接收端设备(即，网络设备)而言，接收到该P个第二符号后，需要使用第二加扰序列对该P个第二符号解扰，获得P个第一符号。该接收端设备可以基于上文2种确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特。并且，接收端设备根据编码信息和该第一待调制比特获得未编码的比特。其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，以及，在发送端设备确定第一待调制比特的两种方式中，关于接收端设备解码的相关内容的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中关于接收端设备解码的相关内容的描述，为了简洁，此处都不再赘述。
实施例7(对应图14)
在该实施例中，发送端设备对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰，以确定第一待调制比特，对该第一待调制比特进行调制，将得到的P个第一符号进行资源映射。
为了便于区分与理解，可以将对该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰得到的比特流记为编码加扰比特流，将对该待传输比特流分组后的比特进行信道编码和加扰后得到的比特记为编码加扰比特。
下面，基于确定该第一星座图的2种方式(方式1和方式2)，对实施例7-A和实施例7-B进行详细说明。
实施例7-A
在该实施例中，先加扰后调制，发送端设备可以基于上述方式1确定第一星座图。
步骤C1：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰，确定第一待调制比特
在该步骤中，可以有两种方式(即，方式7-1和方式7-2)确定该第一待调制比特，两种方式的主要区别在于，方式7-1是对待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后，将得到的编码加扰比特流分组或不分组，以得到该第一待调制比特；方式7-2是在信道编码之前，将该待传输比特流中分组或不分组的比特进行信道编码和加扰得到新的比特(编码加扰比特流或编码加扰比特)，以确定该第一待调制比特。当基于方式7-1确定该第一待调制比特时，该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特；当基于方式7-2确定该第一待调制比特时，若对该待传输比特流分组，则该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的部分比特，若对该待传输比特流不分组，则该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特为该待传输比特流中的全部比特。
方式7-1(编码加扰后分组或不分组)
在该方式中，发送端设备对该待传输比特流进行信道编码，以得到编码比特流，对该编码比特流进行加扰，得到编码加扰比特流，可以基于是否将用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源分组的情况，对该编码加扰比特流分组或不分组，从而，确定该第一待调制比特。
在用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源中所包括的资源单元的数量可能多于一个星座点 对应的资源单元的数量的情况中，可以将该时频资源中所包括的资源单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块。基于此，对于编码加扰比特流，在一种可能的设计中，可以将该编码加扰比特流分为多个组，多组编码加扰比特一一地对应多个调制资源块，编码加扰比特组的组数等于调制资源块的个数，每个调制资源块承载对应的一组编码加扰比特，针对每组编码加扰比特进行调制和资源映射。这里，任一组编码加扰比特即为该第一待调制比特。在另一种可能的设计中，不需要对编码加扰比特流分组，可以将编码加扰比特流作为第一待调制比特，可以对该编码加扰比特流进行重复传输，重复传输的次数为调制资源块的数量。每次传输采用一个调制资源块，任意两次传输采用不同的调制资源块，每次传输中，对该编码加扰比特流进行调制，将调制后的符号映射到对应的调制资源块上。
若用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，也可以不需要对编码加扰比特流分组，将该编码加扰比特流作为一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，这里，该编码加扰比特流即为该第一待调制比特。
针对将编码加扰比特流分组的情况，需要确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特(即，编码加扰比特)，其中，第一待调制比特为任一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特。由于对编码比特流进行加扰并不会影响每个调制资源块对应的比特数，因此，关于确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中步骤C1中关于确定每个调制资源块承载待调制比特的过程，为了简洁，不再赘述。区别在于，这里的待调制比特为编码加扰比特，实施例5-A中的待调制比特为编码比特。关于信道编码的过程的具体描述可以参考实施例5-A中步骤C1中针对信道编码的过程的相关描述，为了简洁，不再赘述。
关于加扰的过程，作为示例而非限定，将编码比特流记为b，采用加扰序列c对该编码比特流进行加扰，将得到的编码比特流记为
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000025
加扰序列c的长度与该编码比特流b的比特数u x相同，对该编码比特流b的每个比特与加扰序列c的每个加扰元素求和模2，得到加扰后的编码加扰比特流
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000026
中的第n个元素为：
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000027
其中，c是加扰序列，其可以是LTE标准或NR标准中的加扰序列，也可以是其它加扰序列。示例性地，c是根据终端设备的无线网络临时鉴定(radio network temporary identity，RNTI)(记为n RNTI)以及n ID得到的伪随机序列，可以将伪随机序列作为加扰序列，因此，c也是加扰序列，n ID为网络设备配置的终端设备的ID或者在物理小区的ID，b(n)表示编码比特流b中的第n项元素，c(n)表示加扰序列c中的第n个元素。mod表示取模运算。
关于确定c(n)的方式的具体描述可以参考实施例3中关于确定c(n)的方式的相关描述，不再赘述。可以通过c init＝n RNTI·2 15+n ID确定c init，参考上述相关描述基于c init确定c(n)，其中，n ID∈{0,1,...,1023}，或，
Figure PCTCN2020078094-appb-000028
表示小区标识。
针对基于方式7-1确定的第一待调制比特，由于是在编码加扰后分组或不分组，所以，该加扰序列的长度可以等于将待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流的比特数。
方式7-2(编码前分组或不分组)
在该方式中，在对该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码之前，在需要将用 于传输待传输比特流的时频资源所包括的资源单元分为多组，得到多个调制资源块的情况中，在一种可能的设计中，可以将待传输比特流分为多个组，多组比特一一地对应多个调制资源块，比特组的组数等于调制资源块的个数，每个调制资源块承载将对应的一组比特进行信道编码和加扰后的编码加扰比特，针对每组编码加扰比特进行调制和资源映射。这里，该第一待调制比特为将任一组比特进行信道编码和加扰后得到的编码加扰比特。在另一种可能的设计中，不需要对待传输比特流分组，对该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰，将得到的编码加扰比特流作为第一待调制比特，可以对该编码加扰比特流进行重复传输，重复传输的次数为调制资源块的数量。每次传输该采用一个调制资源块，任意两次传输采用不同的调制资源块。每次传输中，对该编码加扰比特流进行调制，将调制后的符号映射到对应的调制资源块上。
若用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源所包括的资源单元的数量是一个星座点对应的资源单元的数量，也可以不需要对待传输比特流分组，可以将基于该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后得到的编码加扰比特流作为一个调制资源块承载的待调制比特，这里，第一待调制比特为将该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后得到的编码加扰比特流。
针对将待传输比特流分组的情况，需要确定每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特(即，编码加扰比特或编码加扰比特流)，其中，该第一待调制比特为任一个调制资源块承载的编码加扰比特或编码加扰比特流，具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1中步骤A1中关于确定每个调制资源块承载待调制比特的过程，为了简洁，不再赘述。区别在于，这里的待调制比特为编码加扰比特或编码加扰比特流，实施例1中的待调制比特为未编码的比特。
其中，关于信道编码和加扰的过程，可以参考方式7-1中的相关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
针对基于方式7-2确定的第一待调制比特，由于是在编码前分组或不分组，该加扰序列的长度可以小于或等于对待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流的比特数：若在编码前不分组，该第一待调制比特是基于对该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰的编码加扰比特流，该加扰序列的长度可以等于对待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流的比特数；若在编码前分组，该第一待调制比特是基于对该待传输比特流中的部分比特进行信道编码和加扰的编码加扰比特，该加扰序列的长度可以小于编码比特流的比特数，可以等于对该部分比特进行信道编码后得到的编码比特的比特数。
步骤C2：调制(获得P个第一符号)
发送端设备可以从基于上述方式1确定的该第一星座图中，根据该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定该第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1关于步骤A2的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于这个步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明，应理解，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流分组的其中一组 比特进行信道编码和加扰后的编码加扰比特时，或者，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后得到的编码加扰比特流分组的一组编码加扰比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对该第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，完成针对待传输比特流的处理，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
对于接收端设备而言，针对接收到的P个第一符号，该接收端设备可以基于确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，或者，若该接收端设备为终端设备，也可以基于方式2确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特；并且，根据加扰序列和编码信息分别对该第一待调制比特进行解扰和解码，获得未编码的比特。其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
下面，基于发送端设备确定第一待调制比特的两种方式，对接收端设备解扰和解码的相关内容做简单说明。
若发送端设备是基于方式7-1对待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后的编码加扰比特流分组，由于是对编码比特流分组或不分组，该加扰序列的长度可以等于编码比特流的比特数。并且，对于接收端设备来说，需要获取所有调制资源块(例如，t个调制资源块)承载的待调制比特，将所有调制资源块承载的待调制比特整合为一个编码加扰比特流，采用发送端设备使用的对待传输比特流进行信道编码的编码信息和加扰的加扰序列对该编码加扰比特流解扰和解码，从而，获得未编码的待传输比特流。可以看出，在这种情况中，对第一待调制比特进行解扰和解码的加扰序列和编码信息可以是发送端设备使用的对待传输比特流进行信道编码的编码信息和加扰的加扰序列。
若发送端设备是基于方式7-2对待传输比特流进行信道编码前分组，该加扰序列的长度可以小于或等于对待传输比特流进行信道编码后得到的编码比特流的比特数：若在编码前不分组，该第一待调制比特是基于对该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰的编码加扰比特流，该加扰序列的长度可以等于编码比特流的比特数；若在编码前分组，该第一待调制比特是基于对该待传输比特流中的部分比特进行信道编码和加扰的编码加扰比特，该加扰序列的长度可以小于编码比特流的比特数，可以等于对该部分比特进行信道编码后得到的编码比特的比特数。
并且，接收端设备使用发送端设备对每组比特进行信道编码的编码信息和对每组比特进行加扰的加扰序列对每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特解扰和解码，从而，获得未编码的每组比特，从而，获得未编码的待传输比特流。可以看出，在这种情况中，接收端设备对每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特进行解扰的加扰序列是接收端设备使用发送端设备对每组比特进行加扰的加扰序列，以及，接收端设备对每个调制资源块承载的待调制比特进行解码的编码信息是接收端设备使用发送端设备对每组比特进行信道编码的编码信息。
实施例7-B
在该实施例中，先加扰后调制，发送端设备可以基于上述方式2确定第一星座图，该实施例可以用于上行传输，发送端设备为终端设备。。
步骤C1：对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰，确定第一待调 制比特
在一种可能的设计中，该第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，L 1＝2 u，u为正整数；以及，
该确定第一待调制比特，包括：
根据u和待传输比特流，确定该第一待调制比特，该待传输比特流包括该第一待调制比特，或，该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特。
其中，在该实施例中，仅涉及该待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特的情况。待传输比特流中的至少部分比特可以是该待传输比特流中的全部比特或部分比特；该至少部分比特用于确定该第一待调制比特，可以是对该至少部分比特进行信道编码和加扰处理后得到该第一待调制比特。
在根据第一比特数u和该待传输比特流确定该第一待调制比特的过程中，可以参考实施例7-A，在该步骤中，也可以有两种方式(即，方式7-3和方式7-4)确定该第一待调制比特，两种方式的主要区别和实施例7-A中方式7-1与方式7-2的主要区别类似。
下面，通过方式7-3和方式7-4，对根据第一星座图确定的第一比特数u和待传输比特流确定该第一待调制比特的过程进行详细说明。
方式7-3(编码后分组或不分组)
在该方式中，发送端设备根据编码信息和加扰序列，对待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰，得到编码加扰比特流，基于方式2，根据网络设备的指示确定第一星座图，基于该第一星座图确定对应的第一比特数u，从该编码加扰比特流中获取比特数为u的第一待调制比特：当u等于该编码加扰比特流的比特数时，将该编码加扰比特流作为该第一待调制比特；当u小于该编码加扰比特流的比特数时，从该编码加扰比特流中截取比特数为u的编码加扰比特，该第一待调制比特为该编码加扰比特。其中，关于针对从该编码加扰比特流中截取比特数为u的编码加扰比特的具体描述可以参考实施例2中步骤A1的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述，区别在于，将上文中的待传输比特流类比于这里的编码加扰比特流。
关于信道编码和加扰的过程的具体描述可以参考实施例7-A中步骤C1中关于信道编码和加扰的过程的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
方式7-4(编码前分组或不分组)
在该方式中，发送端设备基于方式2，根据网络设备的指示确定该第一星座图，基于该第一星座图确定对应的第一比特数u；根据u和码率r，确定未编码的比特的比特数u p，其中，u p＝u*r；若u p等于该待传输比特流的比特数u t，则将基于该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后的编码加扰比特流确定为该第一待调制比特。若u p小于该待传输比特流的比特数u t，则从该传输比特流中截取比特数为u p的比特，再根据编码信息和加扰序列，对截取的比特进行信道编码和加扰，获得编码加扰比特，该编码加扰比特即为该第一待调制比特。关于针对从该传输比特流中截取比特数为u p的比特的具体描述可以参考实施例2中步骤A1的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述，区别在于，将上文中的比特数u类比于这里的比特数为u p。
其中，关于信道编码和加扰的过程的具体描述可以参考实施例7-A中步骤C1中关于信道编码和加扰的过程的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C2：调制(获得P个第一符号)
该发送端设备可以从基于上述方式2确定的该第一星座图中，根据该第一星座图中每个星座点与每个比特值的对应关系，确定该第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，获得P个第一符号。其中，关于该步骤的具体描述可以参考情况A中实施例1关于步骤A2的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
步骤C3：资源映射，发送P个第一符号
其中，关于这个步骤的具体描述可以参考上述情况A中实施例1中关于步骤A3的具体描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
上述，以第一待调制比特为例，针对发送端设备对该第一待调制比特的处理过程进行了详细说明。当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流分组的其中一组比特进行信道编码和加扰后的编码加扰比特时，或者，当该第一待调制比特为对该待传输比特流进行信道编码和加扰后得到的编码加扰比特流分组的一组编码加扰比特时，发送端设备对其他待调制比特的处理过程与发送端设备针对该第一待调制比特的处理过程相同，完成针对待传输比特流的处理，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
对于接收端设备(即，网络设备)而言，针对接收的P个第一符号，该接收端设备可以基于确定该第一星座图的方式中的方式1确定该第一星座图，从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点(即，P个第一符号)对应的该第一待调制比特。接收端设备根据加扰序列和编码信息分别对该第一待调制比特进行解扰和解码，获得未编码的比特。其中，关于从该第一星座图中确定该第一星座点对应的该第一待调制比特的过程可以参考方法200中S240的相关描述，以及，在发送端设备确定第一待调制比特的两种方式中，关于接收端设备解扰和解码的相关内容的具体描述可以参考实施例7-A中关于接收端设备解扰和解码的相关内容的描述，为了简洁，此处都不再赘述。
情况D:信道编码+调制+资源映射
参考图15，针对待传输比特流的处理过程包括：步骤D1:对待传输比特流中的至少部分比特进行信道编码以确定该第一待调制比特；步骤D2：对该第一待调制比特进行调制，得到P个第一符号；步骤D3：将该P个第一符号进行资源映射。相比于情况C中的实施例6-A和实施例6-B，情况D中的实施例没有对该P个第一符号加扰的过程，因此，针对情况D中的步骤D1和D2的具体描述可以参考实施例实施例6-A和实施例6-B中关于步骤C1和步骤C2的相关描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
以上，分情况详细描述了本申请实施例的采用非相干传输方式传输数据的方法。基于本申请实施例提出的非相干传输，在某些通信系统中，非相干传输与相干传输可以共存于通信系统中，此种情况中，发送端设备需要判断使用非相干传输还是相干传输来发送数据，接收端设备也需要判断使用非相干传输还是相干传输来接收数据。因此，本申请实施例还提供了用于确定是否使用非相干传输来传输数据的方式。这样，基于不同情况确定使用不同的传输方式，可以使得数据在不同的传输方式下都有着较好的传输性能。例如，在满足一定条件的情况下使用非相干传输，数据的传输性能较好。
以下，对发送端设备或接收端设备确定使用哪种传输方式的多个方式做详细说明
1、在一种可能的设计中，作为发送端设备或接收端设备的终端设备，终端设备可以基于系统规定或协议预定义或网络设备发送的信息确定传输方式，传输方式包括非 相干传输或相干传输。
在网络设备向终端设备发送信息的情况中，该信息可以用于指示传输方式。
示例性地，该信息可以是布尔型指示信息，第一取值表示使用非相干传输，第二取值表示使用相干传输。
示例性地，该信息可以用于指示传输该待传输比特流所采用的星座图，其中，该星座图中每个星座点对应的符号与多个资源单元对应。也就是说，通过指示星座图的方式指示终端设备可以使用非相干传输进行数据的传输。反过来说，当该信息指示的星座图中每个星座点对应的符号与一个资源单元对应，意味着终端设备需要采用指相干传输进行数据的传输。
示例性地，该信息可以用于指示终端设备不传输导频。也就是说，通过指示终端设备不传输导频来指示终端设备可以使用非相干传输进行数据的传输。反过来说，当该信息指示终端设备传输导频，意味着终端设备需要采用相干传输进行数据的传输。
示例性地，该信息可以是高层信令(例如，无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令、多媒体介入控制单元(medium access control control element，MAC CE)信令，也可以是物理层信令(例如，DCI)。
在另一种可能的设计中，作为发送端或接收端的网络设备，网络设备可以基于系统规定或协议预定义或其他方式确定传输方式。其中，网络设备基于其他方式确定传输方式的具体描述可以参考以下第2至第8项中至少一项确定，此处不再赘述。
2、发送端设备或接收端设备根据待传输比特流的信息类型确定传输方式
可选地，若该传输比特流的信息类型为业务数据，可以采用相干传输。
可选地，若该传输比特流的信息类型为控制信息(例如，DCI或UCI)，可以采用非相干传输。
3、发送端设备或接收端设备根据承载待传输比特流的信道确定传输方式
可选地，若承载待传输比特流的信道为物理层控制信道(例如，PDCCH或PUCCH)，可以采用非相干传输。可选地，若承载该待传输比特流的信道为共享信道(例如，PUSCH)时，可以采用相干传输。
4、发送端设备或接收端设备传输待传输比特流的传输方向确定传输方式
可选地，若传输方向为下行传输，可以采用相干传输。
可选地，若传输方向为上行传输，可以采用非相干传输。
其中，上行传输可以是终端设备向网络设备发送数据，下行传输可以是网络设备向终端设备发送数据。
5、发送端设备或接收端设备根据待传输比特流的比特数确定传输方式。
可选地，若待传输比特流的比特数属于第一数值范围，采用非相干传输。
可选地，若待传输比特流的比特数不属于第一数值范围，采用相干传输。
示例性地，第一数值范围可以大于第一数值，或，小于第二数值，或，大于第一数值且小于第二数值。
例如，第一数值范围可以是3～11bit，或，1～11bit。
对于接收端设备来说，作为示例而非限定，可以通过如下方式确定该待传输比特流的比特数。
在一种可能的设计中，接收端设备根据网络设备的配置的用于指示每个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量的资源指示信息和用于指示传输该待传输比特流的资源单元的调度信息确定该待传输比特流的比特数。具体描述可以参考上述的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，当该待传输比特流的信息类型为某些特定类型的信息时，这些特定类型的信息的比特数可以是协议或通信系统预定义的，例如，这些特定类型的信息可以反馈信息(正确应答(acknowledgement，ACK)，或，否定应答(negative acknowledgment，NACK))，信道质量指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)信息等。因此，接收端设备可以根据该待传输比特流的信息类型确定该待传输比特流的比特数。
例如，若信息类型为反馈信息，反馈信息包括确认(acknowledgement，ACK)和否定确认(negative acknowledgement，NACK)，反馈信息对应1个比特。再例如，信道质量指示(channel quality Indicator，CQI)对应5个比特。
6、发送端设备或接收端设备根据传输待传输比特流所采用的天线端口的数量确定传输方式。
可选地，若传输待传输比特流所采用的天线端口的数量小于或等于第二阈值，采用非相干传输。
可选地，若传输待传输比特流所采用的天线端口的数量大于第二阈值，采用相干传输。
示例性地，第二阈值为1或2。
7、发送端设备或接收端设备根据待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量信息类型确定传输方式
可选地，若待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量小于第三阈值，采用非相干传输。
可选地，若待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量大于或等于第三阈值，采用相干传输。
示例性地，第三阈值为1、2、3或4等。其中，待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量是用于传输待该传输比特流的资源单元的数量，其单位可以是RE、RB、RBG等。
8、发送端设备或接收端设备根据终端设备的能力信息确定传输方式，该能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持非相干传输或支持相干传输。
也就是说，终端设备的不同能力支持不同的传输方式。
作为接收端设备或发送端设备的网络设备，可以基于终端设备上报的能力信息确定使用非相干传输进行数据传输。反过来说，当该能力信息指示该该终端设备支持相干传输时，网络设备也可以基于该能力信息确定使用相干传输进行数据传输。
例如，该能力信息可以是终端设备上报的支持或不支持非相干传输的信息，也就是说，当终端设备上报支持非相干传输，则认为终端设备的能力是可以支持非相干传输，当终端设备上报不支持非相干传输，则认为终端设备的能力是不可以支持非相干传输，而是可以支持相干传输。
再例如，该能力信息可以是终端设备支持的一个调制资源块占用的资源单元的数量P的大小或最大值，和/或，该能力信息可以是终端设备支持的待调制比特的比特数u的大小或最大值。举例来说，若P小于或等于第一预设值时，则认为终端设备的能 力是支持非相干传输，若P大于第一预设值，则认为终端设备的能力是不支持非相干传输，而是可以支持相干传输；若待调制比特的比特数小于或等于第二预设值，则认为终端设备的能力是支持非相干传输，若待调制比特的比特数小于或等于第二预设值，则认为终端设备的能力是不支持非相干传输，而是可以支持相干传输。
应理解，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
上文中结合图1至图15，详细描述了本申请实施例的传输数据的方法，下面将结合图16和17，详细描述本申请实施例的通信装置。上述本申请提供的实施例中，分别从发送端设备和接收端设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能，发送端设备和接收端设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块，以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。
应理解，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中，也可以是单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。
图16所示为本申请实施例的通信装置的示意性框图。该装置1600可以是发送端设备，也可以为发送端设备中的芯片系统，或者可以是其它能够和发送端设备匹配使用的装置。该装置1600可以是接收端设备，也可以为接收端设备中的芯片系统，或者可以是其它能够和接收端设备匹配使用的装置。该装置1600包括：收发单元1610和处理单元1620。
在一种可能的设计中，该装置用于实现上述方法中发送端设备的功能。
处理单元1620，用于从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数，第一待调制比特中包括正整数个比特；
收发单元1610，用于使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，不发送所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号，所述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。
处理单元1620可以用于实现图1～图15对应的实施例中所述的发送端设备所执行的方法。
其中，具体描述可以参考方法实施例中的相关描述，此处不做赘述。
在另一种可能的设计中，该装置用于实现上述方法中接收端设备的功能。
收发单元1610，用于在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号，不接收所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号，所述P个第二符号是P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
处理单元1620，用于从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
处理单元1620可以用于实现图1～图15对应的实施例中所述的接收端设备所执行的方法。
其中，具体描述可以参考方法实施例中的相关描述，此处不做赘述。
应理解，这里的装置1600以功能单元的形式体现。这里的术语“单元”可以指应用特有集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、电子电路、用于执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器(例如共享处理器、专有处理器或组处理器等)和存储器、合并逻辑电路和/或其它支持所描述的功能的合适组件。在一个可选例子中，本领域技术人员可以理解，装置1600可以具体为上述实施例中的发送端设备或接收端设备，装置1600可以用于执行上述方法实施例中与发送端设备或接收端设备对应的各个流程和/或步骤，为避免重复，在此不再赘述。
上述各个方案的装置1600具有实现上述方法中发送端设备或接收端设备执行的相应步骤的功能；所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过软件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。例如收发单元可以由发射机和接收机、或者可以由接口等其它通信接口替代。其它单元，如处理单元等可以由处理器替代，分别执行各个方法实施例中的收发操作以及相关的处理操作。此外，装置1600中的收发单元也可以由发送单元和接收单元组成，对于执行与接收相关的操作，可以将该收发单元的功能理解为接收单元执行的接收操作，对于执行与发送相关的操作，可以将该收发单元的功能理解为发送单元执行的发送操作。
图17所示为本申请实施例提供的装置1700。
在一种可能的设计中，该装置用于实现上述方法中发送端设备的功能。该装置可以是发送端设备，也可以是能够安装在发送端设备中或和发送端设备匹配使用的装置。其中，该装置可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
装置1700包括至少一个处理器1720，用于实现本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法中发送端设备的功能。
装置1700还可以包括至少一个存储器1730，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1730和处理器1720耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1720可能和存储器1730协同操作。处理器1720可能执行存储器1730中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。
装置1700还可以包括通信接口，示例性地，该通信接口可以是收发器1710，用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信，从而用于装置1700中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地，该其它设备可以是接收端设备。在本申请实施例中，通信接口还可以是电路、模块、接口等其它形式，用于装置1700和其它设备之间的的通信。
示例性地，处理器1720用于确定第一待调制比特，还用于从第一星座图中确定所述第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；处理器1720利用收发器1710，使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，不发送所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号，所 述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。
处理器1720可以用于实现图1～图15对应的所有实施例中所述的发送端设备所执行的方法。
其中，具体描述可以参考方法实施例中的相关描述，此处不做赘述。
在另一种可能的设计中，该装置用于实现上述方法中接收端设备的功能。该装置可以是接收端设备，可以是能够安装在接收端设备中的装置，或者可以是能够和接收端设备匹配使用的装置。其中，该装置可以为芯片系统。
装置1700包括至少一个处理器1720，用于实现本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法中接收端设备设备的功能。
装置1700还可以包括至少一个存储器1730，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1730和处理器1720耦合。处理器1720可能和存储器1730协同操作。处理器1720可能执行存储器1730中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。
装置1700还可以包括通信接口，示例性地，该通信接口可以是收发器1710，用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信，从而用于装置1700中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地，该其它设备可以是发送端设备。
示例性地，处理器1720利用收发器1710在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号，不接收所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号，所述P个第二符号是P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；处理器1720用于从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
处理器1720可以用于实现图1～图15对应的所有实施例中所述的接收端设备所执行的方法。
其中，具体描述可以参考方法实施例中的相关描述，此处不做赘述。
本申请实施例中不限定上述收发器1710、处理器1720以及存储器1730之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图17中以存储器1730、处理器1720以及收发器1710之间通过总线1740连接，总线在图17中以粗线表示，其它部件之间的连接方式，仅是进行示意性说明，并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图17中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
在本申请实施例中，处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件，可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。
在本申请实施例中，存储器可以是非易失性存储器，比如硬盘(hard disk drive，HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive，SSD)等，还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory)， 例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory，RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。
本申请实施例提供的方法中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，简称DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，数字视频光盘(digital video disc，简称DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。
在本申请实施例中，在无逻辑矛盾的前提下，各实施例之间可以相互引用，例如方法实施例之间的方法和/或术语可以相互引用，例如装置实施例之间的功能和/或术语可以相互引用，例如装置实施例和方法实施例之间的功能和/或术语可以相互引用。
本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样，倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (20)

  1. 一种传输数据的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数，第一待调制比特中包括正整数个比特；
    使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，不发送所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号，所述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，N是基于用于传输所述第一待调制比特的时频资源确定的，或，N是基于用于传输待传输比特流的时频资源和第一阈值确定的，所述待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，所述待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据M或N中的至少一个，确定所述第一星座图，其中，所述第一星座图中每个星座点对应P个符号。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一星座图中的星座点是采用第一加扰序列对第二星座图中的星座点加扰得到的，所述第二星座图中的每个星座点对应P个符号。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一星座图中包括L 1个星座点，L 1＝2 u，u为正整数；
    所述方法还包括：
    根据u和待传输比特流，确定所述第一待调制比特，所述待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，所述待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一星座图中的星座点属于第三星座图，所述第一星座图包括L 1个星座点，所述第三星座图包括L 2个星座点，L 2≥L 1。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述P个第一符号中每个第一符号的幅值相同，和/或，所述P个第一符号中任意两个第一符号之间的相位差为S的整数倍，S＝2*pi/k，k为大于1的整数，pi为圆周率。
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号，包括：
    所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号和第二加扰序列确定的。
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，待传输比特流包括所述第一待调制比特，或，待传输比特流中的至少部分比特用于确定所述第一待调制比特，其中，
    所述待传输比特流为控制信息；或，
    承载所述待传输比特流的信道为物理层控制信道；或，
    传输所述待传输比特流的传输方向为上行传输；或，
    所述待传输比特流的比特数属于第一数值范围；或，
    传输所述待传输比特流所采用的天线端口的数量小于第二阈值；或，
    所述待传输比特流占用的资源单元的数量小于第三阈值。
  10. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置用于执行如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。
  11. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    处理器和存储器，所述处理器和所述存储器耦合，所述处理器用于执行权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。
  12. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和通信接口，
    所述处理器用于从第一星座图中确定第一待调制比特对应的第一星座点，所述第一星座点对应P个第一符号，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数，第一待调制比特中包括正整数个比特；
    所述处理器利用所述通信接口，使用M个天线端口，在N个资源单元上发送P个第二符号，所述P个第二符号是所述P个第一符号，或，所述P个第二符号是基于所述P个第一符号确定的符号。
  13. 一种传输数据的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号或P个第一符号，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
    从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括不接收所述P个第二符号的解调参考信号。
  15. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置用于执行如权利要求13或14所述的方法。
  16. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    处理器和存储器，所述处理器和所述存储器耦合，所述处理器用于执行权利要求13或14所述的方法。
  17. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和通信接口，
    所述处理器利用所述通信接口，在M个天线端口、N个资源单元上接收P个第二符号或P个第一符号，所述P个第二符号是基于P个第一符号确定的符号，所述P个第一符号与第一星座点对应，P＝M*N，M为正整数，N为大于1的整数；
    所述处理器用于从第一星座图中确定所述第一星座点对应的第一待调制比特。
  18. 一种通信系统，包括权利要求10-12任一项所述的通信装置，和权利要求15-17任一项所述的通信装置。
  19. 一种计算机程序产品，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行权利要求1-9、13和14任一项所述的方法。
  20. 一种计算机可读存储介质，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行权利要求1-9、13和14任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/078094 2019-03-19 2020-03-06 传输数据的方法和通信装置 WO2020187054A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP20774142.2A EP3930230A4 (en) 2019-03-19 2020-03-06 DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS
US17/448,035 US11855765B2 (en) 2019-03-19 2021-09-17 Data transmission method and communication apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910207314.1 2019-03-19
CN201910207314.1A CN111726194B (zh) 2019-03-19 2019-03-19 传输数据的方法和通信装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/448,035 Continuation US11855765B2 (en) 2019-03-19 2021-09-17 Data transmission method and communication apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020187054A1 true WO2020187054A1 (zh) 2020-09-24

Family

ID=72519661

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/078094 WO2020187054A1 (zh) 2019-03-19 2020-03-06 传输数据的方法和通信装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US11855765B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3930230A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN111726194B (zh)
WO (1) WO2020187054A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114696951A (zh) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 信号生成方法、装置、终端及可读存储介质
CN114731245A (zh) * 2020-11-06 2022-07-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息发送方法、装置、电子设备和计算机可读存储介质

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210143950A1 (en) * 2019-11-12 2021-05-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Architecture for non-coherent communication in wireless networks
US11757587B2 (en) * 2020-05-24 2023-09-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Switch between coherent and non-coherent PUCCH transmissions

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107528802A (zh) * 2017-07-11 2017-12-29 广州慧睿思通信息科技有限公司 一种使用单天线解双天线空分复用的硬判决方法
CN107846377A (zh) * 2016-09-19 2018-03-27 华为技术有限公司 传输数据的方法和装置
US20190020390A1 (en) * 2016-01-14 2019-01-17 Intel Corporation Apparatus, system and method of communicating according to a transmit space-frequency diversity scheme

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE60313505T2 (de) * 2003-02-13 2007-12-27 Ntt Docomo Inc. Differenzielle sende- und empfangs-diversity mit mehrfacher länge
GB2498767A (en) * 2012-01-27 2013-07-31 Renesas Mobile Corp Identifying a specific antenna port using a CRC masking encoding scheme
CN106788633B (zh) * 2016-12-14 2020-04-14 西安电子科技大学 用于大规模天线系统的上链路非相干空时传输方法
CN108366375B (zh) * 2017-01-26 2021-09-14 华为技术有限公司 一种共享下行频谱的方法和装置
WO2018143722A1 (en) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving of data in wireless communication system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190020390A1 (en) * 2016-01-14 2019-01-17 Intel Corporation Apparatus, system and method of communicating according to a transmit space-frequency diversity scheme
CN107846377A (zh) * 2016-09-19 2018-03-27 华为技术有限公司 传输数据的方法和装置
CN107528802A (zh) * 2017-07-11 2017-12-29 广州慧睿思通信息科技有限公司 一种使用单天线解双天线空分复用的硬判决方法

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3930230A4

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114731245A (zh) * 2020-11-06 2022-07-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息发送方法、装置、电子设备和计算机可读存储介质
CN114731245B (zh) * 2020-11-06 2023-11-21 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息发送方法、装置、电子设备和计算机可读存储介质
CN114696951A (zh) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 信号生成方法、装置、终端及可读存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111726194A (zh) 2020-09-29
US11855765B2 (en) 2023-12-26
US20220006683A1 (en) 2022-01-06
EP3930230A4 (en) 2022-04-27
CN111726194B (zh) 2021-10-22
EP3930230A1 (en) 2021-12-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210352636A1 (en) Downlink channel transmission method and apparatus
CN107683595B (zh) 星座叠加系统及方法
US10440703B2 (en) Physical downlink control channel design for 5G new radio
WO2020187054A1 (zh) 传输数据的方法和通信装置
CN114884619B (zh) 用于对使用极化码的控制信息的联合解码和验证的crc比特
US11122556B2 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
KR101857658B1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서의 제어 정보의 전송 방법 및 장치
US10924244B2 (en) Channel state information feedback method and apparatus
WO2019032741A1 (en) LONG UPLINK CONTROL (LONG PUCCH) PHYSICAL CHANNEL DESIGN INTERVAL STRUCTURE FOR A NEW 5TH GENERATION (5G) RADIO (NR)
WO2019032719A1 (en) MULTI-INTERVALS MULTIPHONIC LOW PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL DESIGN FOR NEW 5th GENERATION RADIO (NR) (5G)
US11082066B2 (en) Efficient control channel design using polar codes
CN113196857B (zh) 在无线通信系统中操作终端和基站的方法以及支持其的装置
CN115134045A (zh) 蜂窝通信系统中的上行链路传输方法和装置
US20230038936A1 (en) Control information transmission method
CN112313892B (zh) 用于在无线通信系统中发送和接收调制信号的方法和设备
US20210288668A1 (en) Efficient control channel design using polar codes
WO2022061622A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信设备、电子设备及计算机可读存储介质
WO2018228522A1 (zh) 发送参考信号的方法、接收参考信号的方法和通信装置
CN102377536B (zh) 反馈信息的传输方法及设备
US20220116253A1 (en) Communication Method And Communication Apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20774142

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020774142

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210923